JP2018103001A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably raise amusement of a game.SOLUTION: In a game hall, an island device S is installed in which a large number of Pachinko machines 10 are provided. As management control means for managing each Pachinko machine 10, a hall computer HC is installed in the game hall. The hall computer HC is electrically connected with each Pachinko machine 10 and performs management processing on the basis of the information received from each Pachinko machine 10. In the island device S, outer-equipped devices EX are installed in the Pachinko machines 10 on a one-to-one basis. Each outer-equipped device EX is mounted in an upper part of the corresponding Pachinko machine 10, and is electrically connected to the hall computer HC as well as to the Pachinko machine 10. In an outer-equipped display device 301 of the respective outer-equipped devices EX, a presentation is performed for the purpose of announcing a high probability mode on the basis of a command outputted from the Pachinko machine 10.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine performs a lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a transition of a gaming state such as a transition to a winning state occurs when the lottery result is a predetermined result To do. In addition, a gaming machine in which a plurality of modes such as a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode exist so that the probability of a predetermined winning result is relatively high as the winning / no-win lottery mode. In this case, the player plays the game while expecting a mode with a high probability of winning.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball having entered a pitching portion provided in the game area, and if the result of the lottery is a lottery result, There is known a configuration in which a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is made. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. In addition, for example, after the special gaming state is ended, a configuration in which the winning / failing lottery mode is changed from one of the high probability mode and the low probability mode to the other is also known. In the high probability mode, for example, an effect different from that in the low probability mode is executed on the display surface, for example, an operation different from that in the low probability mode is executed on a movable member provided in the game area, etc. Thus, the player plays the game while recognizing that the winning / raft lottery mode is the high probability mode (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-39323 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is characterized in that the content of the effect of the first effect and the content of the effect of the second effect when the corresponding state is one of the predetermined state and the state that is not the predetermined state. Corresponding control means for controlling so that regularity occurs between
The regularity does not occur between the production content of the first production and the production content of the second production when the non-corresponding state is the other of the predetermined state and the non-predetermined state. Non-corresponding control means for controlling to be a thing,
With
As a gaming state, there are a first state in which a privilege is easily given to a player and a second state in which it is hard to be given,
The predetermined state is a state in which the player is in the first state, and a state in which the player cannot identify or is difficult to identify whether the notification state of the gaming machine is the first state or the second state. It is a state,
When a specific event that may occur in the course of the game occurs, the state is changed from a state in which one of the corresponding control means and the non-corresponding control means is performed to a state in which the other control is performed. Features.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the transition aspect of the gaming state when a winning result is obtained. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display continuation time acquisition process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the counter subtraction process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transfer process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command response process in sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for production patterns. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process in display side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data table for patterns. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command output process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ending corresponding | compatible process in sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a display mode is lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the process for modes in sound light side MPU. It is the schematic for demonstrating the outline | summary of the electrical structure of the game hall in which many pachinko machines were installed. (A) It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure for communicating between a main controller, a hall computer, and an external device, and the electrical structure of an external device, (b) The front of an external terminal board FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the external output process at the time of the fluctuation | variation start in main side MPU, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a command corresponding table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process for game times in external MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the interlocking production for game times performed with an external device. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of the bonus start in main side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of the bonus end in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus effect control processing in external MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a game stage reproduction effect being performed with an external display apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the production | presentation for estimating the completion | finish reference | standard frequency | count of high probability mode is performed in an external display apparatus, (b) The completion | finish reference | standard of high probability mode in a symbol display apparatus It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the production | presentation for estimating the frequency | count is performed. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure for performing communication between the main controller in 2nd Embodiment, an audio | voice light emission control apparatus, a display control apparatus, a hall computer, and an external device. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command response process in sound light side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the display side command corresponding | compatible process in sound light side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the specific character effect control process in external side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the effect using a specific character is performed in a symbol display apparatus and an external display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the external output process at the time of the fluctuation | variation start performed by the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command response process in sound light side MPU. It is a front view of the pachinko machine and external device in a 4th embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure for communicating between a main controller, an audio | voice light emission control apparatus, a hall computer, and an external device. It is a flowchart which shows the command output process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the external control processing in external MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the production | presentation pattern performed in the sound light side MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the production | presentation pattern performed in the sound light side MPU in 6th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper plate 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail. When the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first working port 33 or a ball enters the second working port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball is entered into the general winning port 31, 10 prize balls are paid out. When a ball is entered into the special electric prize device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Executed.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, although the number of prize balls is smaller in the second operation port 34 than in the first action port 33, the specific number of prize balls may be different from the above. The second working port 34 may be configured to have a larger number of prize balls than the first working port 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 24. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is located on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball from the second working port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. In the part 38a, the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the general-purpose display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display part 37a, a winning change to the first working port 33 or a winning to the second working port 34 is used as a trigger, and a lottery is performed to display a variation display or a predetermined display. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the special figure display part 37a is comprised by the segment display by which several segment light emission parts are arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is considered.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display part 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 37a. A maximum of four game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display portion 37b.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when the special symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display on the basis of the winning in the first operating port 33 or the winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode described later that shifts after winning the winning combination. Is done.

  The display contents when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display surface 41a, the symbols of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display surface 41a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right descending line L4, and a right ascending line L5 are set on the display surface 41a. .

  When symbols are displayed on the display surface 41a based on winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Thus, the variable display is started. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . In addition, when the symbol display is finished, if the result of the internal lottery is either a low probability big hit result or an advantageous big hit result A to C, which will be described later, the same symbol is displayed on any active line. A combination is formed.

  In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, display is started on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and until a predetermined result is displayed and ended, one game game is completed. Equivalent to times. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 3, when a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, it is possible to win the special electricity winning device 32. Transition to open / close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which a game ball can win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin. The game area PA is defined through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 54 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 that bulge to the near side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 60 that controls the main game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 has a main control board accommodated in a board box. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are joined in an inseparable manner, and a structure of a joint portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a controller assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a backpack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power source / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The back pack 72 is provided with an external terminal plate 79 in addition to the payout mechanism 73 and the control device assembly unit 74. The external terminal plate 79 is installed at the upper corner portion of the back pack unit 15 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 on the rotation base end side. The external terminal board 79 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal to allow the game hall management computer to recognize the state of the pachinko machine 10 and inputting a predetermined signal to the pachinko machine 10 from the game hall management computer. It is.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 65 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 65 is connected to a power source / launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 65.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 66 a to 66 e are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. Each of the various winning detection sensors 66a to 66e is provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning-corresponding pitching portions such as the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35. The detection sensor is included, and the MPU 62 makes a winning determination for each winning part. Further, the MPU 62 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the first working port 33 and the second working port 34.

  A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 80 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on a winning determination result for the winning-corresponding winning part. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 80. Details of these various commands will be described later. The MPU 62 transmits a command to the sound emission control device 80 by parallel communication.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the open / close door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the general electric utility 34a of the second operating port 34. The special figure unit 37 and the universal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display part 37 a and a special figure holding display part 37 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal map unit 38 is provided with a universal map display unit 38 a and a universal map hold display unit 38 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the special electricity driving unit 32b so that the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility item 34a is won, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the power unit 34b so that the power utility item 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 62. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the electric utility item 34a is clearly indicated, the MPU 62 performs display control of the normal display portion 38a. In addition, when winning is awarded to the first working port 33 or the second working port 34, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure holding display unit 37b is executed in the MPU 62. When the winning to the through gate 35 is generated or when the variable display is started in the general map display unit 38a, the display control of the general map hold display unit 38b is executed in the MPU 62.

  The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power / fire control device 78, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

  The power / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is connected to the main power supply unit. Electric power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60. In addition, the power source / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The audio emission control device 80 includes an audio emission control board 81 on which an MPU 82 is mounted. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  Based on the command received from the main control device 60, the MPU 82 determines the contents of effects to be executed in the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, and the like. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 provided in the front door frame 14 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 provided in the front door frame 14 are performed so that an operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. I do.

  The MPU 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 90. The MPU 82 transmits, to the display control device 90, a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 60 and a notification including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 60. The display control device 90 is not configured to receive a command from the main control device 60 without going through the sound emission control device 80, and communicates more than the sound emission control device 80 in relation to the main control device 60. It can be said that it exists downstream in the direction.

  The display control device 90 includes a display control board 91 on which an MPU 92 that is an element in which a program ROM 93 and a work RAM 94 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 95, a character ROM 96, and a video RAM 97 are mounted. It has.

  The MPU 92 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 80 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 95 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 95).

  The program ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when holding the stored information. The work RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 92, and volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 95 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver installed in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 95 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 95 should be said to be a microcomputer chip having a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 95 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 92, the video RAM 97, etc., and intervenes in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 97 from the character ROM 96 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 96 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 96 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 97 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 97.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 are referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83, and RAM 84 of the sound emission controller 80 are respectively sounded. The light-side MPU 82, the sound-light side ROM 83, and the sound-light side RAM 84 are referred to as the MPU 92, the program ROM 93, and the work RAM 94 of the display control device 90, respectively, as the display-side MPU 92, the display-side ROM 93, and the display-side RAM 94.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the sound light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 by bidirectional communication.

  That is, the sound emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are electrically connected using the first signal line group 101, and the sound signal side MPU 82 is changed to the display side MPU 92 using the first signal line group 101. A command is sent to Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the first signal line group 101 includes a signal line 102 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. A signal line 103 for clock signal for identification and a signal line 104 for latch signal for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command are included. Note that a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

  Further, the sound emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are electrically connected using the second signal line group 111, and the second signal line group 111 is used to change from the display side MPU 92 to the sound light side MPU 82. A command is sent to Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 111 includes a signal line 112 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data. A signal line 113 for clock signal for identification and a signal line 114 for latch signal for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command are included. Note that a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

  The first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 111 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one ends of the first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 111 are aggregated, and a connector in which the other ends are aggregated, and one connector is a sound emission control device. The other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 90.

  The communication method between the sound light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Alternatively, the first signal line group 101 and the second signal line group 111 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 62 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display unit 37a, symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, display setting of the general symbol display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, when the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 41 fluctuate and change. Reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the variation type for determining the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display unit 41 The counter CS is used. Furthermore, the utility power release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the utility power 34aa of the second working port 34 is set to the utility power open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64b of the RAM 64.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as an acquisition information storage means in the RAM 64 when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. It is stored in the reserved storage area 64a.

  The holding storage area 64a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, In addition, combinations of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored and stored. .

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and starting one game round At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general electric utility release counter C4 will be described. For example, the utility power release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general electric power holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at a timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the universal utility 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the universal utility release counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric utility 34 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area, the power utility 34a of the second working port 34 is per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric power open state in the electric power open lottery using the electric power utility opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 34a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. Has been. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the public electric power is selected and the open state of the general electric utility 34a is generated a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open train lottery than in the low frequency support mode. The display duration time for the display unit 38a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased. When a winning is made to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 38a based on a winning to the through gate 35) is secured after the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed after the first public train opening lottery is performed, the reserved time concerned The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to zero. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the holding storage area 64a of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The random number value to be won is stored in the ROM 63 as a success / failure table. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, as the success / failure table, the success / failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 8 (a) and the success / failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 8 (b) are set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 8A, there are two random number values (for example, “5” and “305” that are the big winners). ]). On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the number of random number values that are the big wins is the low-probability mode success / failure. More than 20 tables are set, specifically 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”). ”,“ 245 ”,“ 276 ”,“ 305 ”,“ 334 ”,“ 365 ”,“ 392 ”,“ 420 ”,“ 470 ”,“ 495 ”,“ 520 ”,“ 558 ”,“ 575 ”, “599”). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  If the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  In both the low probability mode and the high probability mode, even if the winning lottery does not result in a big win, it can be a small win. While the big win is an opportunity to move to the open / close execution mode and can be an opportunity to move to at least one of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode, the small win is an opportunity to move to the open / close execution mode, There will be no opportunity for transition in both the winning / failing lottery mode and support mode. In other words, when winning the big win, after the transition to the opening and closing execution mode, at least one of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode may be different from the mode before the start of the opening and closing execution mode, it was a small win In this case, after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, both the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode are the same as the modes before the opening / closing execution mode starts.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to, the number of random number values that wins a small win is larger than the number of random number values that win a big win. There are also many settings. Specifically, there are three random number values (for example, “55”, “355”, and “555”) for winning a small hit. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the number of random numbers for winning a small win is the value of the random number for winning a big win. The number of random numbers is set to be larger than that in the case where the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to. Specifically, the number of random numbers for winning a small hit is 5 (for example, “55”, “205”, “355”, “455”, “555”).

  In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the random number value for the big win and the random number value for the small win. In the case of a losing result, there is no transition triggered by the lottery result for all of the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode, and the support mode.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 49, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reserved storage area 64a of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. These jackpot results are (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, ( 3) At least one of the three contents of the support mode after completion of the opening / closing execution mode is different.

  The opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the big hit is won is a round number regulation mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won the special electric prize device 32. That is. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  In the round number regulation mode, the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode are set so that the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 32 is relatively high between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode. And are set. Specifically, in this pachinko machine 10, a single opening mode of the special prize winning device 32 is set in a plurality of types with different opening durations from when the special prize winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. Yes. Specifically, a long-time mode set to 29 sec, which is a long open duration, and a short-time mode set to 0.1 sec, which is a shorter duration than the above long time, are set. ing. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. The In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, an opening duration time is set that is shorter than the product of the launching period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, shorter than the launching period of the game balls. ing. Therefore, when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode, it is expected that the special electricity prize winning device 32 will receive the maximum number of prizes in one round game. When the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened once in this mode, it is expected that no prize will be given to the special electricity prize winning device 32 or that there will be about one even if a prize occurs.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in a long-time manner in each round game. That is, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened 15 times in a long-time manner. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special prize winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short time mode. That is, the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened 15 times in a short time mode.

  In addition, the number of opening / closing of the special electric prize device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value as long as the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 32 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode starts and ends. It is.

  By the way, in the opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the small win is won, no round game is set, the number of opening / closing of the special electric prize device 32 becomes the upper limit number, and a predetermined upper limit number of games The open / closed number regulation mode is terminated when one of the conditions for the ball to win the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. In the opening / closing number regulation mode, the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened in the short time mode by the same number of times as the number of opening / closing of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the round number regulation mode. That is, the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened 15 times in a short time mode. In this case, the upper limit number of end conditions of the open / close number regulation mode is set to nine. And as already explained, since the release continuation time in the short-time mode is 0.1 sec and the launch period of the game ball is 0.6 sec, the total open duration in the open / close number regulation mode is The time is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle and the upper limit number of opening / closing number regulation modes. Therefore, in the open / close number regulation mode, a round game is not executed, and it is determined whether or not the upper limit number is based on the total number of winnings in the open / close number regulation mode. The probability that the opening / closing of will be executed increases.

  The types of jackpot result types for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the ROM 63 as a sorting table. In the allocation table, as shown in FIG. 9, as the allocation destination of the type of jackpot result, a low likelihood hit result, an unspecified high likelihood hit result, an explicit high likelihood hit result, an advantageous jackpot result A, An advantageous jackpot result B and an advantageous jackpot result C are set.

  The transition state of the gaming state in the case of these jackpot results will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description with reference to FIG. 10, the transition state of the gaming state in the case of a small hit result will also be described.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. This low-probability mode is the next jackpot result, and at least continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the high frequency support mode continues until the number of games after the transition reaches the high frequency end reference number (specifically, 100 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more, and then the low frequency support mode. Migrate to This low-frequency support mode is the next jackpot result, and at least continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The non-explicit high probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues until the number of games reaches the longest end reference number (specifically, 70 times) set as a number of 1 or more after the transition, and then transitions to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is the next jackpot result, and at least continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The support mode is a high-frequency support mode if the mode before switching to the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, while a jackpot that is the low-frequency support mode if the mode before switching to the opening / closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. It is a result. When the high frequency support mode is entered, the success / failure lottery mode continues until the high probability mode shifts to the low probability mode. Further, the low frequency support mode is the next jackpot result, and at least continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The explicit high-accuracy big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the number of games reaches the longest end reference number (specifically, 70 times) set as one or more after the transition. Transition to infrequent support mode. The low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The advantageous jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the number of games after the transition reaches the shortest end reference number (specifically, 30 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more. Transition to infrequent support mode. The low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The advantageous jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the number of games after the transition reaches the intermediate end reference number (specifically 50) set as the number of times of 1 or more. Transition to infrequent support mode. The low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The advantageous jackpot result C is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the number of games reaches the longest end reference number (specifically, 70 times) set as one or more after the transition. Transition to infrequent support mode. The low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The small hit result is a game result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the opening / closing number regulation mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, both the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode are maintained in the mode before the opening / closing execution mode transition. The success / failure lottery mode and the support mode will be the next jackpot result, and will at least continue until shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the non-explicit high-accuracy big hit result and the explicit high-probability big hit result, the number of round games is changed to a round number regulation mode in which the maximum number of rounds is set to 15, and each round game is opened / closed once in a short time manner. Is done. In addition, in the small hit result, it shifts to the opening / closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened and closed 15 times in a short time mode. That is, when any of the non-explicit high-accuracy big hit results, the explicit high-precision big hit results, and the small hit results is obtained, the operation mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is visually the same. In addition, in the game times when these game results are obtained, the special figure display unit 37a displays different stop results, but the symbol display in which the display area is set larger than the special figure display unit 37a. In the device 41, the stop result is displayed in such a manner that it cannot be identified. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a common symbol combination (for example, “3 · 4 · 1”) on any active line.

  In this case, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result and the small hit result are in a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, and at least a predetermined number of game times have not been consumed after the opening / closing execution mode. If there is not, the aspect of the effect in the symbol display apparatus 41, the display light emission part 53, and the speaker part 54 also becomes an aspect which cannot identify which game result it is. Thus, in the situation of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, when the open / close execution mode that becomes the low frequency prize mode or the open / close execution mode that becomes the open / close number regulation mode occurs, the player The game is played with the expectation that the mode is shifted to the high probability mode after the completion, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the low probability big hit results and the advantageous big hit results A to C, the game moves to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and in each round game, the special electric prize device 32 is opened and closed once in a long time mode. Done. That is, when the low probability big hit result and the advantageous big hit results A to C are obtained, the operation mode of the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is visually the same. In addition, in the game times when these game results are obtained, the special figure display unit 37a displays different stop results, but the symbol display in which the display area is set larger than the special figure display unit 37a. In the device 41, the stop result is displayed in such a manner that it cannot be identified. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays the same symbol combination on any active line. Further, the aspect of the effect on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 during the opening / closing execution mode in the case of these game results is also an aspect in which any game result cannot be identified. Furthermore, when these game results are obtained, after the opening / closing execution mode, the mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode regardless of the type of support mode before the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the player plays the game with the expectation that it has shifted to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the longer end The game is played while expecting to shift to the high-probability mode of the standard number of times, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The number of completion reference times for the high frequency support mode is set more in the case of the low probability big hit result than in the case of the advantageous big hit results AC. As a result, even if the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode has occurred, even if the transition to the high-probability mode does not occur, the high-frequency support mode is the longest, so the low-predictive hit result It becomes possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

  In addition, when an unspecified high probability winning result or an explicit high probability winning result that causes a transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is obtained, the termination criterion number of times in the high probability mode is the highest advantageous winning result. The same number of times as in A is selected. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the non-explicit high probability hit result and the explicit high probability hit result.

  In the distribution table, as shown in FIG. 9, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 49”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” is non- It corresponds to the explicit high probability jackpot result, “15-19” corresponds to the explicit high probability jackpot result, “20-29” corresponds to the advantageous jackpot result A, “30-39” This corresponds to the advantageous jackpot result B, and “40 to 49” corresponds to the advantageous jackpot result C.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 41 that can display a variation of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the corresponding result at the stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining combinations in that state are displayed. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface G after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started on the display surface G of the symbol display device 41, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, in the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, or in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, the combination is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the detachment result, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. To be executed.

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main control device 60 but by the sound emission control device 80. In this case, in the sound emission control device 80, the game times corresponding to any of the big hit results or the small hit results are more likely to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the lost results, and the appearance rate A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that a low notice display is likely to occur. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the display continuation time in the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display continuation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 37a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main MPU 62>
Next, each process performed in order to advance a game in the main side MPU62 is demonstrated. The main MPU 62 process is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the main side RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main side MPU 62 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / fire control device 78 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 64. It is determined whether or not. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 64 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 64 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is given to the sound emission control device 80 in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 62 will be described. The main control board 61 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle. Further, the main control board 61 is divided so as to exist in the middle of a signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 62. A peripheral circuit is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 62. . That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the main MPU 62 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The main MPU 62 executes processing for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts timer interrupt processing with at least one condition as confirming the occurrence of the specific signal form. And execute.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution state of the process in the main MPU 62, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 62, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 62 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, The timer interrupt process at this timing absorbs the amount exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board. If the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

  In subsequent step S205, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set to the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 64.

  In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the general utility 34a of the second working port 34 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the general power drive unit 34b is started, and the closed state should be switched to. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are read, and the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are read. A process for specifying whether or not there is a ball is executed.

  In the subsequent step S210, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the launch operation device 28, as already described, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec.

  In the subsequent step S212, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 66a to 66e and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208. Do.

  In the subsequent step S213, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  In the subsequent step S214, the ordinary power control process is executed. In the ordinary map electric power control process, when winning through the through gate 35 occurs, a process for acquiring numerical information of the universal electric utility release counter C4 is executed and the numerical information is stored. In such a case, the numerical information is determined to be released, and the opening determination is used as an opportunity to execute a process for performing an effect for the normal drawing on the general drawing display unit 38a. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the utility wire 34a of the second working port 34 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure hold display unit 37b, and The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the figure display unit 38a to the general figure hold display unit 38b is set. In step S216, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display content of the general map display unit 38a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  In the following step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the subsequent step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after executing the processing of steps S207 to S218, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning information to the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 is generated, a process for acquiring the holding information is executed and the holding information is stored. A determination for whether or not the hold information is true is made, and further, a process for performing an effect for the game round is executed using the decision as to whether or not the information is appropriate. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed in step S301. In the acquisition process, when a game ball wins in the first working port 33 or when a game ball wins in the second working port 34, a holding area in the holding storage area 64a. When the number of the hold information stored in the RE is read and the number of the hold information is less than the upper limit value (specifically “4”), the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 Are stored in the uppermost area of the holding area RE where no holding information is stored.

  In the acquisition process, when the hold information is acquired, a hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. The sound light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display side MPU 92. The display-side MPU 92 receives the hold command, and changes the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. When the number of hold information increases as described above, the display control process in step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) displays so as to change to the display content corresponding to the increase in the hold number. Control is performed.

  In the subsequent step S302, information on the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 64 is read out, and in the step S303, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 63 is read out. In step S304, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table.

  Here, the processing content of step S302-step S304 is demonstrated.

  As already described, the special figure special power control process includes a process for controlling the effect for game play and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for game times, a special figure variation start process (step S306) that is a process for starting the effect for game times and an effect for game times are advanced. And a special figure changing process (step S308), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is set.

  Also, as a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode opening, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 32 Special electric power release opening process (step S310), special electric charge closing process (step S311) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 32, opening / closing execution mode ending and opening / closing execution mode end A special electric power end process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main side MPU 62 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the program address for executing the special figure variation process (step S307). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the program address for executing the special electricity start process (step S309). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power open process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special power close process (step S311). This is the start address, and the start address SA6 A start address of a program for executing (step S312).

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the process executed in the process, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared. Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed. The special figure special electricity counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

  After executing the process of step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed in step S305. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S306. If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process in step S307. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S308. If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S309. If it is SA4, the process jumps to the special power open process in step S310. If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power close process in step S311. If the acquired start address is SA6. The process jumps to the special electricity ending process in step S312. When any one of steps S306 to S312 is executed, the special figure special power control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the process of step S306-step S312 is demonstrated separately.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start process of step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 64a. If a negative determination is made in step S401, the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, a data setting process is executed. In the data setting process, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a shift command for causing the voice light emission control device 80 to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted may be set as an output target and transmitted.

  In a succeeding step S403, an appropriateness determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, referring to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the main ROM 63, it is acquired from the information stored in the execution area AE for the validity determination, that is, the winning random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the obtained numerical information matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the low probability mode determination table provided in the main ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot value information.

  In a succeeding step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S403 is a jackpot winning result. If the result is a big win, the distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 63, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained as described above. Specifically, it specifies which jackpot result corresponds to the low likelihood jackpot result, the non-explicit high jackpot result, the explicit high likelihood jackpot result, or the advantageous jackpot results A to C.

  In the subsequent step S406, a stop result setting process for the big hit result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of the change is obtained from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  The information on the type of the picture to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the pattern mode may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S407, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RAM 64 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination result in step S405 is displayed. Set “1” to the corresponding flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the result is not a big hit winning result, in step S408, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S403 is a small hit result. If it is a small hit result, a stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed in step S409. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the current game round is specified from the stop result table for the small hit result stored in advance in the main ROM 63, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result. In the subsequent step S410, “1” is set to the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 64.

  If a negative determination is made in step S408, a stop result setting process for an outlier is executed in step S411. More specifically, the stop result table for outliers stored in advance in the main ROM 63 is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance as to the pattern mode information to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game times corresponding to the current start of change. And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The picture mode information selected in this case is different from the picture mode information selected for the jackpot result and the picture mode information selected for the jackpot result.

  After executing any one of steps S407, S410, and S411, display duration acquisition processing is executed in step S412. The acquisition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not both the high probability counter and the high frequency counter provided in the main RAM 64 are 1 or more. The high probability counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games in the high probability mode by the main MPU 62. When the high probability counter is 1 or more, the success / failure determination table for the high probability mode is referred to in the determination processing. Is done. In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result, the high-probability counter is set with data corresponding to the high-probability end reference count, and every time a game is completed, the high-probability counter ends. The data is updated so that the reference number is decremented by one. When the high probability end reference count becomes “0”, the success / failure lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. The high-frequency counter is a counter for specifying the number of continued games in the high-frequency support mode by the main MPU 62. Processing is executed. In addition, the high frequency counter sets the data corresponding to the high frequency end reference number when the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result ends, and ends the high frequency every time the game time ends. The data is updated so that the reference number is decremented by one. When the high-frequency end reference count becomes “0”, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, the first table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S502. The first table is table data in which a plurality of types of display duration times of game times in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are determined. Thereafter, in step S503, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, the number of hold information stored in the hold storage area 64a is read, and various lottery results are grasped. As for grasping the various lottery results, the content of whether the result of the winning or failing lottery is a jackpot result, a jackpot result or a disapproval result, in the case of a jackpot result, the content of which type of the jackpot result, In the case of an outlier result, the contents whether or not to generate reach display is included. When determining whether or not a reach display is to be generated in the case of a missed result, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is referred to among the hold information that triggered the current game round. In subsequent step S504, display duration data corresponding to the various data specified in step S503 is read from the first table and set as the display duration of the current game time. Thereafter, the acquisition process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S505 whether the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the second table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S506. The second table is table data in which a plurality of types of display duration times of game times in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are determined. Thereafter, in step S503, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, the number of hold information stored in the hold storage area 64a is read, and various lottery results are grasped. In the subsequent step S504, display duration data corresponding to the various data specified in step S503 is read from the second table and set as the display duration of the current game time. Thereafter, the acquisition process ends.

  In the first table and the second table, it is easier to select a shorter display duration than when other tables for display duration are referenced. Specifically, when the current game time corresponds to any one of the big hit result, the small hit result, and the outreach display, the display duration corresponding to each is selected. On the other hand, in game times that result in an outage that does not cause reach display, if the number of hold information stored in the holding area RE is one or more, display in game times that result in an outage that does not cause reach display Display duration time shorter than the average display duration time when another table for duration time is referenced and the number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE is 3 or 4 ( (For example, 2 sec or 3 sec) is selected, and even if no hold information is stored in the hold area RE, other tables for display duration are referred to in the game times that result in an outage that does not cause reach display. Display duration (for example, 6 sec or 7 sec) shorter than the display duration selected when the hold information is not stored in the hold area RE. It is selected. By selecting the display duration as described above, the game times can be consumed in a short time in the situation of the high frequency support mode, and the time required for the next jackpot result to be generated is shortened. It becomes possible.

  The first table and the second table have different display durations that are selected when reach display occurs, or different display durations that are easily selected when reach display occurs. Specifically, in the case where the reach display is generated, the display duration time is longer in the case of the first table so that the reach display of the content having a high expectation result that is a big hit result is more likely to occur in the case of the first table. Is easier to select. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach display is generated so that the second table is more likely to generate a reach display with a high expectation level resulting in a jackpot result than the first table. In some cases, a long display duration may be easily selected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S505, it is determined in step S507 whether one of the high probability counter and the small hitting counter provided in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more. The after-hit counter is a counter for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the game number of the after-hit reference number of times has already been consumed since the small-hit result. After the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result ends, the data corresponding to the reference number for the small hit after hit is set in the small hit after counter, and every time the game round ends, The data is updated so that the number of times is decremented by one. In addition, the value of the counter-hit counter is cleared to “0” when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. In the step S507, the situation is the high probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, or the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode in which the game number of the game number of the small hits after the small hit result is digested. Affirmative determination is made when the situation is not completed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S507, the third table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S508. The third table shows that the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, and the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, and the completion of the game times of the base number for small hits after the small hit result is completed. This is table data in which a plurality of types of display duration times of game times in a situation that is not set are determined. Thereafter, in step S503, as already described, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, the number of hold information stored in the hold storage area 64a is read, and various lottery results are grasped, and in step S504. The display duration data corresponding to the various data specified in step S503 is read from the third table and set as the display duration of the current game time. Thereafter, the acquisition process ends.

  Either in a high-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode, or in a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode in which the completion of the game number of small hits after a small hit result has not been completed However, by referring to the common third table, the game duration display duration is selected in a common manner in these situations. This makes it difficult for the player to identify which one of these situations from the aspect of game times, and expects the player to enter the high probability mode in that situation. Will do. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  If a negative determination is made in step S507, another table stored in the main ROM 63 is selected in step S509. Thereafter, in step S503, as already described, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, the number of hold information stored in the hold storage area 64a is read, and various lottery results are grasped, and in step S504. The display duration data corresponding to the various data specified in step S503 is read from other tables and set as the display duration of the current game time. Thereafter, the acquisition process ends.

  Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 14), after executing the display continuation time acquisition process in step S412, the process proceeds to step S413, and the display continuation time information obtained in step S412 is obtained. Set the special electric timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 12) already described. By the way, as the effects for the game times, the variation display of the symbols on the special symbol display unit 37a and the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are carried out. In the state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, the combination of the predetermined symbols on the active line is in a standby state), the final stop is displayed for the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S412 is a time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game.

  In the subsequent step S414, the change command and the type command are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. The change command has a data structure of 2 bytes. The 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and display duration time. And corresponding data. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a change command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the validity determination process is performed by the next 4 bits of data. In addition, lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and time data corresponding to the display duration time is set by the remaining 8-bit data. Therefore, when the sound side MPU 82 receives the change command, the sound side MPU 82 recognizes the change command from the identification data, and uses the lottery result data to determine the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. And the display duration of the current game time is recognized from the time data. Here, since the main MPU 62 selects a different display continuation time depending on whether or not reach occurs, even if the information on whether or not reach occurs is not included in the change command, the display is displayed on the sound light MPU 82. It is possible to specify the presence or absence of reach from the duration information. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command has a data structure of 2 bytes. The 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and the rest of the high probability mode. Data corresponding to the number of continuations and the remaining number of continuations in the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the validity determination process and the following 4 bits of data are set. Data for lottery results corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining number of continuation data corresponding to the remaining number of continuations in the high probability mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high frequency support mode by the remaining 8-bit data Is set. Therefore, when receiving the type command, the sound side MPU 82 recognizes the type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. The remaining number of continuations in the high probability mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high frequency support mode are recognized from the data for the number of continuations.

  Here, both the change command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 82 collates the lottery result data included in the variation command with the lottery result data included in the type command, so that noise or the like is received with respect to the reception of the variation command and the type command. It is possible to specify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. And when both the lottery result data match, the production control corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command is executed, and when both the lottery result data do not match Can notify it. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound light side MPU 82 may execute an effect for game times corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game times. For example, in the effect for game times, the determination process and the determination of distribution are performed. Regardless of the result of the processing, the symbol display device 41 may reliably stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to complete detachment. In this case, the game turn effect may be configured to be performed over a display duration corresponding to the time data included in the variation command, or may be configured to continue until the next variation command and type command are received. Also good.

  After executing the process of step S414, the display of the variation of the pattern in the special figure display part 37a is started in step S415. In the subsequent step S416, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1” when the process of step S416 is executed. " Then, after executing the external output process at the start of the fluctuation in step S417, the special figure fluctuation start process is terminated. The contents of the external output process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process of step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 13) will be described.

  In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether or not it is during the game time duration and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is determined. A process for changing regularly is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. Further, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not reach display occurs.

  Also, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, this special figure is executed after executing the above regular change process. The process during change is terminated. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the final stop display timing comes. When the final stop display timing is reached, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 82 in order to display the final stop display result of the current game round on the symbol display device 41. The display mode of the pattern on the display unit 37a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. Further, information on the final stop time (0.5 sec) of the game times is read from the main ROM 63 and set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process.

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure determining process in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the final stop time of the current game time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the special figure finalizing process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S602.

  In step S602, external output processing at the end of fluctuation is executed. The processing contents will be described later. Thereafter, in step S603, a counter subtraction process is executed. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the counter subtraction process.

  In the counter subtraction process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the value of the high probability counter of the main RAM 64 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, the value of the high probability counter is decremented by 1 in step S702, and it is determined whether or not the value of the high probability counter after the subtraction is “0” in step S703. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, “1” is set to the high probability end flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S704. The high probability end flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that the success / failure lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S701 or step S703, or if the process of step S704 is executed, it is determined in step S705 whether the value of the high frequency counter in the main RAM 64 is 1 or more. To do. If a negative determination is made in step S705, the counter subtraction process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the value of the high frequency counter is decremented by 1 in step S706, and it is determined in step S707 whether the value of the high frequency counter after the subtraction is “0”. To do. If a negative determination is made in step S707, the counter subtraction process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, “1” is set to the high-frequency end flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S708. The high frequency end flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

  Returning to the description of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), after the counter subtraction process is executed in step S603, in step S604, the result of the success / failure determination that triggered the current game round becomes the big hit result or small result. It is determined whether the result is a hit result.

  If a negative determination is made in step S604, a mode transition process is executed in step S605. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the mode transition process.

  In the mode transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in both the high probability end flag and the high frequency end flag of the main RAM 64. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, an explicit high-accuracy end command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 in step S802. As a result, the sound light side MPU 82 can specify that the state of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode has ended, and the contents of the production can be associated therewith. In a succeeding step S803, an external output setting process at the end of the explicit high-accuracy state is executed. The processing contents of the external output setting process will be described later. Thereafter, in step S804, both the high-probability end flag and the high-frequency end flag in the main RAM 64 are cleared to “0”, and then the mode transition process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S805 whether or not “1” is set in the high probability end flag of the main RAM 64. When an affirmative determination is made in step S805, it means that the state of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode ends, and the state shifts to the state of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. . In this case, after the high probability end flag is cleared to “0” in step S806, the mode transition process is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S805, it is determined in step S807 whether or not “1” is set in the high-frequency end flag of the main RAM 64. If a negative determination is made in step S807, the mode transition process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the state of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode ends. It means a transition to a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S808.

  In step S808, the high frequency end command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. As a result, the sound light side MPU 82 can specify that the state of the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode has ended, and the contents of the effect can be associated therewith. In a succeeding step S809, an external output setting process at the end of the high frequency state is executed. The processing contents of the external output setting process will be described later. Thereafter, in step S810, the high-frequency end flag of the main RAM 64 is cleared to “0”, and then the mode transition process is ended.

  Returning to the description of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16), after executing the mode transition process in step S605, the special figure special electric counter value is cleared to “0” in step S606, and then this special figure is being finalized. End the process. As a result, the special figure fluctuation start process is executed in the next special figure special electric control process.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S604, the process proceeds to step S607, information on the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 63 is read, and information on the opening time is read in step S608. Set to special figure special electric timer counter. Incidentally, the opening time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In a succeeding step S609, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. The opening command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 82 to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results and the jackpot result is the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 82 can execute the effect in the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  In subsequent step S610, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, the value of the special figure special power counter is “2” when the special figure determination process is executed. Therefore, when the process of step S610 is executed, the special figure special electric counter value is “3”. Become.

  Thereafter, in step S611, after executing the external output setting process at the time of starting the bonus, the special figure determining process is terminated. The details of the external output setting process at the start of the bonus will be described later.

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process of step S309 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 13) will be described.

  In the special electricity start process, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed, and if it has elapsed, whether or not the execution trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is any jackpot result Determine. In the case of any jackpot result, 15 is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 64 and 10 is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 64. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening / closing execution mode by the main MPU 62, and the winning counter is the upper limit number of game balls in one round game or one opening / closing number regulation mode. The main MPU 62 specifies whether or not a winning has occurred. Then, an opening continuation time corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter, and the special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into an opened state. Further, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, an open command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. By receiving the opening command, the sound light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effect in the opening / closing execution mode accordingly.

  When the current open / close execution mode is triggered by the small hit result, 15 is set in the open / close counter provided in the main RAM 64 and 10 is set in the winning counter. The open / close counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify the number of times to open and close the special prize winning device 32 in the open / close execution mode of the open / close number regulation mode. Then, the opening duration corresponding to the small hit result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter, and the special electric prize winning device 32 is put into an open state. Further, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, an open command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82.

  In both the case where the jackpot result is triggered and the case where the jackpot result is triggered, after the special electricity winning device 32 is opened, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1, and the special electricity start process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” when the special electricity start process is executed, it becomes “4” after 1 is added.

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special power open process in step S310 in the special special charge control process (FIG. 13) will be described.

  In the special electric release opening process, if the current opening / closing execution mode is the round number regulation mode, it is determined whether or not the end condition of one round game is satisfied, and if the end condition is satisfied The special electric prize winning device 32 is brought into a closed state, and a closing command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the closing time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and is specifically 1 sec longer than the game ball firing cycle. When the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the closed state, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether the value of the round counter is “0” or not. In this case, the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity release process is executed is “4”, so “1” is added after the addition of 1.

  If the current open / close execution mode is the open / close number regulation mode, when the opening duration of the special prize winning device 32 has elapsed, the special prize winning device 32 is closed and a closing command is sent to the sound side MPU 82. Send to. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the open / close counter after 1 subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the closing time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. As already described, the closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the opening duration time has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not a winning to the special electricity winning device 32 has occurred, and when a winning has occurred, the winning counter is decremented by one. When the value of the winning counter after subtraction is “0”, the open / close counter is cleared to “0” and the special electricity winning device 32 is closed. When the special electricity prize winning device 32 is in the closed state, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether the value of the open / close counter is “0” or not. In this case, the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity release process is executed is “4”, so “1” is added after the addition of 1.

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electricity closing process in step S311 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 13) will be described.

  In the special electric power closing process, it is determined whether or not both the round counter and the open / close counter are “0”. If either one is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the special electric power closing process is terminated as it is, and if the closing time has elapsed, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The opening duration corresponding to the hit result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Further, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, an open command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. Thereafter, after the special figure special electricity counter is decremented by 1, this special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity closing process is executed is “5”, it becomes “4” after 1 subtraction.

  On the other hand, when both the round counter and the open / close counter are “0”, an ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. The ending command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 82 to recognize that it is a timing for starting an effect for ending. The ending command includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results and the jackpot result is the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 82 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result triggered by the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the information on the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 63 is read, and the information on the ending time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, after the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1, this special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “5” when the special electricity closing process is executed, it becomes “6” after 1 is added.

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special electric power end process of step S312 in the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special electric power end process, it is determined in step S901 whether the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the special electric power end processing is terminated as it is. If the ending time has elapsed, a game state transition process is executed in step S902, an external output setting process at the end of the bonus is executed in step S903, and the special figure special electricity counter is set to “0” in step S904. After clearing, this special electric power termination processing is terminated.

  As the external output setting process at the end of the bonus in step S903 will be described later, the gaming state transition process in step S902 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the winning result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that has been completed this time is an advantageous jackpot result A or an advantageous jackpot result B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, values corresponding to each jackpot result are set in the high probability counter and high frequency counter of the main RAM 64 in step S1002. Specifically, in the case of an advantageous jackpot result A, both the high probability counter and the high frequency counter are set to “30”, and in the case of an advantageous jackpot result B, the high probability counter and the high frequency counter are set. Set “50” to both.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1003 whether the winning result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that has ended this time is one of the explicit high-probability winning result or the advantageous big winning result C. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, “70” is set in each of the high probability counter and the high frequency counter of the main RAM 64 in step S1004.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1003, it is determined in step S1005 whether or not the hit result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that has been completed this time is an implicit high-precision hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1005, it is determined in step S1006 whether or not the value of the high-frequency counter in the main RAM 64 is “0”. If the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more, “70” is set in both the high probability counter and the high frequency counter in step S1004. If the value of the high frequency counter is “0”, “70” is set in the high probability counter in step S1007.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1005, it is determined in step S1008 whether or not the winning result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that has been completed this time is a low likelihood winning result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, the high probability counter is cleared to “0” and the high frequency counter is set to “100” in step S1009.

  When the process of step S1002, step S1004, step S1007, or step S1009 is executed, after executing the external output setting process at the start of high frequency in step S1010, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external output setting process, external output of a signal indicating the high frequency support mode is started on condition that the value of the high frequency counter is 1 or more.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1008, it means that the winning result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that has been completed this time is a small hitting result. In this case, the mode transition process (FIG. 18) already described is executed in step S1011. Thereafter, in step S1012, after setting “30” in the after-hit counter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

<Processing Configuration in the Sound Light Side MPU 82 and the Display Side MPU 92>
Next, each process for performing execution control and notification in the sound light side MPU 82 and the display side MPU 92 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing of MPU 82 on the light side>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec) by the sound light side MPU 82.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S1101, a main command storage process is executed. The main-side command storage process is a process for storing a command in the sound light side RAM 84 when a command is received from the main-side MPU 62. The sound side RAM 84 is provided with a main ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the main ring buffer. The data is sequentially read according to the stored order.

  In a succeeding step S1102, display side command storage processing is executed. The display side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the sound side RAM 84 when a command is received from the display side MPU 92. The sound light side RAM 84 is provided with a display side ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the display side MPU 92. The commands received from the display side MPU 92 are sequentially stored in the display side ring buffer. The data is sequentially read according to the stored order.

  Thereafter, in step S1103, a main-side command handling process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main-side MPU 62 is executed. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main-side command response processing.

  In the main command handling process, first, a mode process is executed in step S1201. The processing contents of the mode processing will be described later. In a succeeding step S1202, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62. If these commands have been received, game result storage processing is executed in step S1203. Specifically, from the information included in the command for change, the information on which is the result of the lottery determination and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 62 at the start of the current game round is specified, A process of writing the specified information in the sound side RAM 84 is executed. In the storage process, the lottery result data included in the variation command and the lottery result data included in the type command are collated, and the communication of the variation command and the type command is performed normally. If the communication is abnormal, a corresponding notification process and data storage process may be performed.

  In the subsequent step S1204, a notice lottery process is executed. In the notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. As the notice display, as already described, since the symbol display on the symbol display device 41 is started, the symbols are variably displayed on all symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or a part of the notice display is displayed. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol sequences, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and a background screen as a previous mode Includes a different predetermined mode, and a pattern on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. The notice display may occur at any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, in the notice lottery process, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are more likely to generate a notice display and more likely to generate a notice display having a lower appearance rate than the game times corresponding to the missed result. A lottery will be conducted.

  In subsequent step S1205, stop symbol determination processing is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is one of the low probability big hit result and the advantageous big hit result A to C, the stop where the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 Information corresponding to the result is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, in both the low probability jackpot result and the advantageous jackpot results A to C, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same even symbol combination can be selected. However, the higher probability of selecting odd symbol combinations is set higher in the advantageous jackpot results A to C than the low probability jackpot result. As a result, when the same odd symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41, the player shifts to the high probability mode than when the same even symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Expect. Note that the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an explicit high probability hit result, an unspecified high probability hit result or a small hit result, the same symbol combination is established on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific symbol combination (“3 · 4 · 1”) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. . In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an out-of-game result, the presence or absence of reach display is specified from the contents of the change command. And when reach display occurs, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and on one or two effective lines L1 to L5 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, when reach display does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols and the specific symbol combination are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and reach on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is not established is determined as information on the current stop result.

  In the subsequent step S1206, processing for determining the effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, information on the display duration of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command received this time, the information on the display duration, the information on the game result specified in step S1203, and the step An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of lottery result information in the advance notice lottery process in S1204 is selected. In selecting the effect pattern, an effect pattern table provided in the sound light side ROM 83 is referred to.

  Here, the effect pattern table will be described with reference to FIG. In the effect pattern table, effect patterns are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the types of change commands and the types of results of the notice lottery process in step S1204. Specifically, in the case of the change command “A111”, two pseudo-reams, A reach, and A special reach are selected as performance patterns when the notice lottery result is 1, and when the notice lottery result is two. As the production pattern, one pseudo-ream, B reach, A cut-in, and A special reach are selected. When the result of the notice lottery is 3, the first pseudo-ream, C reach, and A Special reach is selected.

  The pseudo-ream refers to the fact that the high-speed fluctuation is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 to switch to the low-speed fluctuation, and thereafter the fluctuation display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is ended and a predetermined stop result is obtained. The unit variation effect that is displayed is an effect that is performed a plurality of times during one game. In this case, in the last unit variation effect in one game round, the combination of symbols corresponding to the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process in the main MPU 62 is stopped and displayed. The combination of symbols indicating that is stopped is displayed. The combination of symbols indicating that they are in a quasi-continuous state is not displayed with the same symbol combination stopped, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the explicit high-accuracy big hit result, the unspecified high-precision big hit result, and the small hit result is stopped. In addition, the combination of reach symbols is also a combination that does not stop and is a combination of symbols that makes it possible to recognize that it is a pseudo-continuation. For example, a combination of symbols “3, 5, and 7” is stopped and displayed on one active line.

  A reach is a normal reach performed in a situation where an A type character appears, and a B reach is a normal reach performed in a situation where a B type character appears. Is normal reach performed in a situation where a C-type character appears. A cut-in is an effect in which a cut-in image of an A type character is displayed in a situation where normal reach is being performed. A special reach is a special reach performed in a situation where an A type character appears.

  As described above, with respect to one change command transmitted from the main MPU 62, the sound light MPU 82 can select a plurality of types of effect patterns based on the result of the notice lottery process. However, in any of the plurality of types of effect patterns that can be selected from these one variation command, the display duration of the entire game time is a common display duration corresponding to the one variation command. This makes it possible to execute an effect for game times according to the display continuation time determined by the main MPU 62, while suppressing an excessive increase in the types of variation commands transmitted from the main MPU 62, It is possible to diversify the production pattern.

  Further, common production contents exist in common among production patterns that can be selected from one variation command. Specifically, the variation command “A111” is common in that a pseudo-ream occurs and an A special reach occurs. Thereby, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes easy to design so as to have a common display continuation time while adopting a configuration in which a plurality of types of effect patterns can be selected from one variation command.

  Note that the configuration in which a plurality of types of effect patterns can be selected from one variation command as described above is the same for other variation commands. For example, in the case of a variation command “A112”, a plurality of types of effect patterns are selected. While having a configuration in which a pattern can be selected, it is common in the point that C reach occurs between each production pattern. In addition, for example, in the case of the variation command “A113”, a configuration in which a plurality of types of effect patterns can be selected is common in that three effect sequences are generated between the effect patterns.

  Returning to the description of the main command handling process (FIG. 22), after executing the process of step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, a process of writing each information of the type of effect pattern selected in step S1206 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S1205 to the sound light side RAM 84 is executed. In addition, since the information on the display duration of the current game times is included in the production pattern, writing the information on the production pattern in the sound side RAM 84 allows not only the information on the production pattern but also the information on the display duration. The sound light side MPU 82 can read again. However, the sound light side MPU 82 does not measure the display duration time.

  In subsequent step S1208, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result in step S1205 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result in step S1206 are transmitted to display-side MPU 92.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1202, or after the processing in step S1208 is executed, it is determined in step S1209 whether a final stop command has been received. If the final stop command has been received, the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1210. The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 92 to wait for the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round on the active lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the final stop time.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or after the processing in step S1210 is executed, it is determined in step S1211 whether an opening command has been received. If an opening command has been received, an opening handling process is executed in step S1212. In the opening handling process, the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the production contents in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result are determined. Execute the process for In the subsequent step S1213, an opening command corresponding to the processing result in step S1212 is transmitted to the display-side MPU 92.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1211, or after executing the process of step S1213, it is determined in step S1214 whether an open command has been received. If the release command has been received, in step S1215, the display-side MPU 92 recognizes that the release of the special electric prize device 32 has been newly started, that is, that one round game has been newly started. The release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1214, or after the processing of step S1215 is executed, it is determined in step S1216 whether a close command has been received. If the close command has been received, in step S1217, the display side MPU 92 is notified to the display side MPU 92 in order to make the display side MPU 92 recognize that the special electric prize winning device 32 has been closed, that is, that one round game has ended. Send a close command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1216, or after the processing in step S1217 is executed, it is determined in step S1218 whether an ending command has been received. If an ending command has been received, an ending handling process is executed in step S1219. In the ending handling process, the contents of the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode included in the ending command received this time are specified, and the process for determining the contents of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the lottery mode is executed. To do. The processing contents of the ending correspondence processing will be described in detail later. In the subsequent step S1220, an ending command corresponding to the processing result in step S1219 is transmitted to the display-side MPU 92.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1218, or after the processing in step S1220 is executed, it is determined in step S1221 whether or not a notification command is received. The notification command is used when it is determined in the fraud detection process in step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) of the main MPU 62 that a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred. It is also output when it is specified in the input state monitoring process in step S212 that the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open. When the notification command is received, in order to perform the notification, the light emission data reading process is executed in step S1222, and the sound output data reading process is executed in step S1223. Thereby, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 is performed in a mode corresponding to the content of the notification command, that is, a mode corresponding to an event that triggered the output of the notification command. Is called. Thereafter, in step S1224, a notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display-side MPU 92.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1221, or after the processing in step S1224 is executed, it is determined in step S1225 whether a release command has been received. The release command is output when it is specified in the fraud detection process of step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) of the main MPU 62 that the state where the predetermined event has occurred is released, It is also output when it is specified in the input state monitoring process in step S212 that the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 has transitioned from the opened state to the closed state. If the cancel command has been received, in step S1226, the light emission data set in step S1222 and the sound output data set in step S1223 are cleared. Thereafter, in step S1227, a cancel command corresponding to the content of the cancel command received this time is transmitted to the display-side MPU 92.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1225, or after the processing of step S1227 is executed, the main side command response processing is terminated after other corresponding processing is executed in step S1228. In other processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demo start command has been received. If the demo start command has been received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 92.

  Demo display means that a predetermined start waiting period for demo start (for example, 0.1 sec) has passed without the start of a new game round after the end of the game round in a situation that is not in the open / close execution mode. In this case, or after the power supply to the main MPU 62 is started or after the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a start waiting period for starting a demo (for example, 3 sec. ) Is started in the symbol display device 41. In the demonstration display, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are performing a predetermined operation is displayed. However, the display is not limited to this. For example, the symbols perform a predetermined operation. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of displaying a displayed image. Further, in the configuration in which the demonstration display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game round may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demonstration display can be diversified.

<V interrupt processing of display-side MPU 92>
Here, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically, 20 msec.

  When the image signal for one frame is output to the symbol display device 41, the VDP 95 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display surface 41a, and then on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output for the arranged dots, and image signals are output from the left to the right dots in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dots in the lower right corner of the display surface 41a. In this case, the VDP 95 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display-side MPU 92 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, so that the display-side MPU 92 recognizes that the update of one frame image has been completed. The output period of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, the V interrupt process is newly started when 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started.

  In the V interrupt processing, first, in step S1301, command analysis processing is executed. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the display side RAM 94 are analyzed. In a succeeding step S1302, it is determined whether a new command is received based on the analysis result in the step S1301. If a new command has been received, command response processing is executed in step S1303.

  In the command handling process, when a stop result command and a pattern command are received, a pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the display ROM 93 and written in the display RAM 94.

  The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current game play effect on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the current game round effect is defined.

  The pattern data table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is an example of a pattern data table that can be selected when an advantageous jackpot result C is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the pattern data table, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the display duration time of the target game times is set. Corresponding to each pointer information, the contents of the task are set. Information, command output presence / absence information, and additional data information are set.

  The task content information is information set to display a video corresponding to the current game round, and unless information that does not reflect the task content information is set as additional data, In the frame, an image corresponding to information on the contents of the task is displayed. In the information on the contents of the task, parameter information necessary for instructing the VDP 95 to perform drawing in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing is set.

  Specifically, with respect to the pattern data table shown in FIG. 25, data at the start of variation is set in the pointer information “0”, and data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information “200”. , “300” pointer information is set to the end of the notice effect, “400” pointer information is set to the normal reach start data, and “700” pointer information is set to the super reach start time. The data at the start of the definite effect is set in the pointer information “1000”, and the data at the end of the variation is set in the pointer information “1400”. Each piece of pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the change of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling the moving image display between the break timings is set.

  The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of a command output from the display side MPU 92 to the sound light side MPU 82 and the type of the command. The display side MPU 92 outputs a command to the sound light side MPU 82 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, thereby enabling the display light emitting unit 53 to execute a light effect according to the content of the image. At 54, it is possible to execute a sound output effect according to the content of the image.

  Specifically, with respect to the pattern data table shown in FIG. 25, command data is set for pointer information “0” in which data at the start of variation is set in the task contents. Therefore, at the start of the variation of the game times, light emission control and sound output control are started in the sound light side MPU 82 based on command transmission from the display side MPU 92 to the sound light side MPU 82. In addition, in the contents of the task, from the pointer information in which each of the data at the start of the notice effect, the data at the start of normal reach, the data at the start of super reach, the data at the start of the final effect and the data at the end of the variation is set Also, the pointer information at the timing before the number of frames (the number of pointers) for pre-transmission, specifically, the pointer information of “198”, “398”, “698”, “998”, “1398” Command data is set. Therefore, command transmission from the display-side MPU 92 to the sound light-side MPU 82 is performed in advance for the break timings other than when the game times start to change, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 and the light emission control are performed at these break timings. It is possible to completely synchronize the sound output control and the contents of the drive control of the movable object.

  The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the pattern data table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when a notification execution instruction is given. When the additional data is written, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image is set as a notification, the image display is performed so that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. Made.

  In the command handling process, when a final stop command is received, a final stop setting process is executed. In the final stop setting process, a process of reading a data table for static display of the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round from the display ROM 93 and writing it to the display RAM 94 until the final stop display period has elapsed. Run.

  In the command handling process, when an opening command is received, an opening data table corresponding to the opening command is read from the display ROM 93 and written to the display RAM 94. The opening data table is for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current opening / closing execution mode on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is a group of information in which processing necessary for is defined. The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. In other words, in the opening data table, not only the information group in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined, but also the sound corresponding to the delimiter timing of the production. Data for transmitting commands to the optical side MPU 82 is set. However, in the opening data table, the contents of effects during each round game and during the interval period between round games are determined from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data in the round game is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is held until the corresponding round game is finished, and similarly, the data in the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is held until. The range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched in response to reception of an open command or a close command.

  In the command handling process, when either an open command or a close command is received, a setting process at the time of opening and closing is executed. In the opening / closing setting process, the range of pointer information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the contents of the received command.

  In the command handling process, when an ending command is received, an ending data table corresponding to the ending command is read from the display ROM 93 and written to the display RAM 94. The ending data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when a moving image corresponding to the current ending effect is displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table. In other words, in the ending data table, not only the information group in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of the image is defined, but also the sound corresponding to the delimiter timing of the production. Data for transmitting commands to the optical side MPU 82 is set.

  In the command response process, when a notification command is received, a notification data setting process is executed. In the notification data setting process, notification data corresponding to the notification content included in the current notification command is written as additional data in the currently set data table. Thereby, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of event to be notified is added to the effect image for game times and the effect image for the opening / closing execution mode. .

  In the command response process, when the release command is received, the notification data clear process is executed. In the notification data clear process, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time among the notification data set in the additional data of the data table at present Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type that is the cancellation target is canceled.

  Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 24), if a negative determination is made in step S1302, or after the process of step S1303 is executed, a pointer update process is executed in step S1304. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, the display-side MPU 92 can grasp the processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  In subsequent step S1305, task processing is executed. In the task processing, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in an area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table. When there is no additional data, the task data of the current pointer is read from the data table, and in accordance with the read task data, the VDP 95 is displayed to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing. Calculation of parameters required for drawing instruction is performed. On the other hand, if there is additional data in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table, it is determined whether or not the additional data is additional data for the task data image. In the case of additional data, the task data and additional data of the current pointer are read from the data table, and an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing is displayed according to the read task data and additional data. , Calculation of parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 95 is performed. If it is not the additional data, the additional data of the current pointer is read from the data table, and a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 95 in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing according to the read additional data. Performs calculation of parameters necessary for execution.

  After the task processing is executed in step S1305, it is determined in step S1306 whether or not command data exists in the data output area corresponding to the current pointer information in the data table. If command data exists, it is command output timing, so command setting processing is executed in step S1307.

  In the command setting process, a command indicating that the game times should be started, a command indicating that the notice display should be started, a command indicating that normal reach should be started, a command indicating that super reach should be started, A command indicating that the variation should be ended, a command indicating that the production of the opening / closing execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the production of the round game should be started, and that the production of the interval between round games should be started A command indicating that the ending effect should be started, a command indicating that the demonstration display should be started, and the like are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 in accordance with each timing.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1306, or after the processing of step S1307 is executed, the drawing interrupt output processing is executed in step S1308, and then this V interrupt processing is terminated. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 95. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The VDP 95 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 97 according to this drawing list. The VDP 95 outputs a signal to the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

<Timer interrupt processing of MPU 82 on the light side>
Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21) of the sound light side MPU 82, after executing the main side command response process in step S1103, the display side command response process is executed in step S1104. In the display-side command handling process, a process of reading the light emission data and the sound output data is executed according to the content of the command received from the display-side MPU 92. Thereby, the light emission control corresponding to the display content of the symbol display device 41 is executed for the display light emitting unit 53, and the sound output control corresponding to the display content of the symbol display device 41 is executed for the speaker unit 54. The

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main MPU 62 is used as a reference, the sound light side MPU 82 exists on the upstream side of communication with respect to the display side MPU 92, but the sound light side MPU 82 displays the display side MPU 92. Dare to wait for the command to be sent before starting the production execution control. Thereby, when each of a light emission effect, a sound output effect, and a display effect occurs in the same period, it becomes difficult to produce a shift in each effect. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform an effect using a plurality of types of effect means.

  Thereafter, in step S1105, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 is performed according to the light emission data read out in the main-side command corresponding process in step S1103 or the display-side command corresponding process in step S1104.

  In a succeeding step S1106, a sound output control process for performing sound output control of the speaker unit 54 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 is performed according to the sound output data read in the main-side command corresponding process in step S1103 or the display-side command corresponding process in step S1104. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Direction in Pachinko Machine 10 for Predicting the Number of Continues in High Probability Mode>
Next, the content of the effect in the pachinko machine 10 for making a player predict the continuation frequency of high probability mode is demonstrated.

  First, the ending command output process executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ending command output process is executed in the special power closing process in step S311 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 13).

  In the ending command output process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the hit result that has caused the current opening / closing execution mode transition is either the low probability hit result or the advantageous jackpot results AC. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, an ending command corresponding to the jackpot result is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 in step S1402. Specifically, the first ending command is transmitted in the case of the low probability jackpot result, the second ending command is transmitted in the case of the advantageous jackpot result A, and the third ending command in the case of the advantageous jackpot result B. When the ending command is transmitted and the advantageous jackpot result is C, the fourth ending command is transmitted. Thereafter, the ending command output process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1403, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-frequency counter is 1 or more. Determine whether or not. In the case of the opening / closing execution mode shifted to the low frequency support mode, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the hit result that is the transition trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, the fifth ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 in step S1405, and then the ending command output process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1404, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the winning result that has caused the current opening / closing execution mode transition is an implicitly highly accurate winning result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, the sixth ending command is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 82 in step S1407, and then the ending command output process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1406, it means that the hit result that has caused the current opening / closing execution mode transition is an explicit high-accuracy win result. Therefore, in step S1408, an explicit ending command is sent to the sound side. After the transmission to the MPU 82, the ending command output process is terminated.

  If it is the opening / closing execution mode shifted to the high frequency support mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, and the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is determined whether or not the hit result that has caused the current opening / closing execution mode to be a small hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, the seventh ending command is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 82 in step S1410, and then the ending command output process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it means that the winning result that has become the trigger for the opening / closing execution mode this time is an explicit high probability winning result or an unspecified high probability winning result, so in step S1411 After transmitting the eighth ending command to the sound side MPU 82, the ending command output process is terminated.

  Next, the ending correspondence process executed by the sound light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The ending handling process is executed in step S1219 in the main command handling process (FIG. 22).

  In the ending correspondence process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not any of the first to seventh ending commands has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process advances to step S1502, and the lottery table corresponding to the received ending command is read from the sound light side ROM 83. In the subsequent step S1503, a lottery process in the display mode is executed. In the display mode lottery process, numerical information is obtained from a random number counter for lottery, which is a counter provided in the sound light side RAM 84 and whose numerical information is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec cycle). The display mode is selected by comparing the information with the lottery table read out in step S1502. In step S1504, the selected display mode is set as a future display mode. In addition, since the ending command corresponding to the display mode set here is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1220 in the main side command response processing (FIG. 22), an image corresponding to the set display mode is displayed. Display control is performed in the display side MPU 92 so as to be displayed on the display device 41. Then, this ending correspondence process is terminated.

  Here, the manner in which the display mode is selected by lottery will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display mode is for notifying the player of the expectation level that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, and for notifying the player of the expectation level that the high probability mode is the number of end reference times. It is a display content in the symbol display device 41. The display corresponding to this display mode is started during the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, and is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the subsequent game round. As display modes, as shown in FIG. 28, six types of first display mode to sixth display mode are set.

  Between each display mode, at least one of the background screen of the symbol display device 41 and the symbol type variably displayed on each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is different. A display corresponding to a display mode such as “expectation” is made. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the sound output from the speaker part 54 differs between each display mode.

  The first display mode to the third display mode are display modes that are selected when the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode. Among the first display mode to the third display mode, the first display mode is a display mode that is easily selected when the high-probability mode has a long end reference number, and the second display mode has a high end reference number that is intermediate or short. The display mode is easy to select when the probability mode is entered, and the third display mode is the display mode easy to select when the low probability mode is entered.

  On the other hand, the fourth display mode to the sixth display mode are display modes that are selected when the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. Among the fourth display mode to the sixth display mode, the fourth display mode is a display mode that is easily selected when the high probability mode is set, and the probability that the fifth display mode is the high probability mode when it appears and the low probability The sixth display mode is a display mode that is easily selected when the low probability mode is set.

  When the first ending command is received, that is, when the low probability winning result is obtained, the first lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate in the first display mode is 5%, the selection rate in the second display mode is 10%, and the selection rate in the third display mode is 85%. When the second ending command is received, that is, when the advantageous jackpot result A is obtained, the second lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate in the first display mode is 15%, the selection rate in the second display mode is 60%, and the selection rate in the third display mode is 25%. When the third ending command is received, that is, when the advantageous jackpot result B is reached, the third lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate in the first display mode is 30%, the selection rate in the second display mode is 50%, and the selection rate in the third display mode is 20%. When the fourth ending command is received, that is, when the advantageous jackpot result C is reached, the fourth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate of the first display mode is 85%, the selection rate of the second display mode is 10%, and the selection rate of the third display mode is 5%.

  That is, when the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode and the display mode of the subsequent game times become the first display mode, so that the player has a high probability mode with a long end reference number. The game will be played with great expectation. Even if the third display mode is entered, the possibility of being in the high probability mode remains, and further, the possibility of being in the high probability mode with a long end reference number remains, so that the player's expectation is completely lost. There is no end to it.

  When the fifth ending command is received, that is, when a small hit result is obtained during the low frequency support mode, the fifth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate in the fourth display mode is 5%, the selection rate in the fifth display mode is 10%, and the selection rate in the sixth display mode is 85%. When the sixth ending command is received, that is, when the result of the non-explicit high probability winning result is obtained during the low frequency support mode, the sixth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate in the fourth display mode is 85%, the selection rate in the fifth display mode is 10%, and the selection rate in the sixth display mode is 5%.

  That is, when the low-frequency winning mode is opened / closed execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, and the low-frequency support mode is continued after the open / close execution mode, the ending period of the open / close execution mode and the display mode of the subsequent game times are By entering the fourth display mode, the player plays a game with great expectation that the high probability mode has been entered. Further, even if the sixth display mode is entered, the possibility of the high probability mode remains, so that the player's expectation is not completely lost.

  When the seventh ending command is received, that is, when a small hit result is obtained during the high frequency support mode, the seventh lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate in the first display mode is 5%, the selection rate in the second display mode is 10%, and the selection rate in the third display mode is 85%. When the eighth ending command is received, that is, when the non-explicit high probability winning result or the explicit high probability winning result is obtained during the high frequency support mode, the eighth lottery table is selected. In this case, the selection rate of the first display mode is 85%, the selection rate of the second display mode is 10%, and the selection rate of the third display mode is 5%.

  In other words, when the low-frequency winning mode open / close execution mode is entered during the high-frequency support mode, the ending period of the open / close execution mode and the display mode of the subsequent game times become the first display mode, so that the player becomes the end criterion. The game is played with high expectation that the high probability mode with a long number of times has been reset. Also, even if the third display mode is entered, the possibility of the high probability mode remains, and further, the possibility that the high probability mode with a long end reference count has been reset remains, so the player's expectation The feeling never disappears.

  Returning to the description of the ending handling process (FIG. 27), if a negative determination is made in step S1501, it means that an explicit ending command has been received. In this case, after setting to the explicit display mode in step S1505, the ending correspondence process is terminated. In addition, since the ending command corresponding to the display mode set here is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1220 in the main side command response processing (FIG. 22), an image corresponding to the set display mode is displayed. Display control is performed in the display side MPU 92 so as to be displayed on the display device 41. Then, this ending correspondence process is terminated.

  The explicit ending command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 when an explicit high probability winning result is obtained in the low frequency support mode. When an explicit high probability winning result is obtained during the low frequency support mode, the low frequency winning mode open / close execution mode is performed, and then the high frequency support mode is entered. In contrast, other hit results do not have this behavior. Therefore, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the result is an explicit and highly probable result. Therefore, when an explicit high-probability result is obtained during the low-frequency support mode, the display mode for explicit display is set, and this is clearly notified to the player. In the explicit display mode, an image indicating the high probability mode is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and an image indicating that the end reference number is 70 is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the mode processing executed by the sound light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The mode processing is executed in step S1201 in the main-side command response processing (FIG. 22).

  In the mode processing, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether the current display mode is any of the first display mode to the third display mode and the explicit display mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1602 whether or not an explicit high-definition end command or a high-frequency end command has been received. As described above, the end command in the explicit high-accuracy state is in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the game times for the end reference number of times are digested, and the low probability mode and the low frequency support are completed. This command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 when shifting to the mode state. In addition, the end command in the high-frequency state is already in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, as described above. This command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 when shifting to the state of the support mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the processing for this mode is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the display mode is set to the normal mode. After that, the normal mode command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1604, and then the mode processing is terminated. The normal mode is a display mode for notifying that the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are in effect, and the symbol display device 41 displays a corresponding image, and the speaker unit 54 supports it. Sound is output.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1605 whether the current display mode is any one of the fourth display mode to the sixth display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1605, the processing for this mode is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether a lottery condition for the display mode is satisfied. Specifically, the numerical information is obtained from a lottery condition determination random number counter which is a counter provided in the sound light side RAM 84 and whose numerical information is periodically updated (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). It is determined whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the establishment of the lottery condition. The probability that the lottery condition is satisfied is 10% until the game times are executed 10 times after the opening / closing execution mode, 50% in the range of 11 to 20 times, and 80 in the range of 21 to 30 times. %, And when it is 31 times, it becomes 100%. If a negative determination is made in step S1606, the processing for this mode is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, a lottery process in the display mode is executed. In this lottery process, the same process as step S1503 in the ending correspondence process (FIG. 27) is executed. However, in the lottery process, first, a lottery for shifting to the normal mode is performed. The probability of winning the transition to the normal mode is 10% until the game times are executed 10 times after the opening / closing execution mode, 50% in the range from 11 times to 20 times, and the range from 21 times to 30 times Is 80%, and when it is 31 times, it is 100%. If the transition to the normal mode is won, the normal mode is set in step S1608, and the corresponding display mode command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in the subsequent step S1609, and then this mode processing is terminated. To do. On the other hand, in the case of not winning the transition to the normal mode, the same lottery table as the lottery table used in the previous step S1503 is used as the lottery table. In step S1608, the display mode corresponding to the lottery result is set, and in the subsequent step S1609, a display mode command corresponding to the lottery result is transmitted to the display side MPU 92, and then the mode processing is terminated.

  As described above, even if the high probability mode is entered, if the game times of the end reference number are executed, the low probability mode is set even if the open / close execution mode is not generated, and the end reference number of times is 0. In a configuration in which a plurality of types are set such as 30 times, 50 times, and 70 times, the symbol display device 41 or the like produces an effect for allowing the player to predict the high probability mode and the end reference number of times of the high probability mode. Is done. As a result, the player not only plays the game with the expectation that the high probability mode will be set, but also plays the game with the expectation that the high probability mode with the higher number of end reference times will be entered. Is planned.

<Direction using external device EX>
Next, a configuration for performing an effect using the external device EX will be described. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of an electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed.

  As shown in FIG. 30, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. As a management control means for managing each pachinko machine 10, a hall computer HC is provided in the game hall. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and an MPU 201 is mounted therein. In the MPU 201, various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and ROM 202 storing fixed value data, and various data and information input from the pachinko machine 10 when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed are temporarily stored. And a RAM 203 which is a memory for storing the data. The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through the electrical wiring group EL1. And the management process based on the information received from each pachinko machine 10 is performed.

  In the island facility S, an external device EX is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with each pachinko machine 10. Each external device EX is mounted above the corresponding pachinko machine 10, is electrically connected to the hall computer HC through the electrical wiring group EL2, and is electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 through the electrical wiring group EL3. It is connected. Each external device EX includes an external display device 301 for displaying various types of information, and a plurality of types of external operation units 302 that are operated to display various types of information on the external display device 301. It has been.

  The external display device 301 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by an external control board (described later) provided in the external device EX. The external display device 301 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. There may be.

  In the external display device 301, at least one of the number of executions of the game times from the previous opening / closing execution mode, the number of executions of the opening / closing execution mode, the number of balls played since the opening of the game hall, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is Various types of information such as the number of opening / closing execution modes that have occurred in the ongoing situation and the number of balls that have been played in the ongoing situation are displayed based on signals from the hall computer HC. Thereby, the player can grasp the various information by visually recognizing the external display device 301. Various information displayed on the external display device 301 can be switched by operating the external operation unit 302.

  Next, a configuration for performing communication among the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10, the hall computer HC, and the external device EX, and an electrical configuration of the external device EX will be described with reference to FIGS. This will be described with reference to (b).

  As shown in FIG. 31 (a), the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an external terminal plate 79, and the main MPU 62 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 79 through the electrical wiring group EL4. Is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 79 through the electrical wiring group EL1, and the external device EX is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 79 through the electrical wiring group EL3. Various signals are transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 79, and various signals are transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX. In addition, transmission of signals from the hall computer HC to the pachinko machine 10, transmission of signals from the external device EX to the pachinko machine 10, and transmission of signals from the external device EX to the hall computer HC are not performed. .

  As shown in FIG. 31B, the external terminal plate 79 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 79a to 79l. A total of 12 external terminals 79a to 79l are provided, of which 9 external terminals 79a to 79i are terminals for externally outputting information from the main MPU 62 to the hall computer HC, and the remaining 3 The external terminals 79j to 79l are terminals for externally outputting information from the main MPU 62 toward the external device EX.

  Specifically, information indicating that the main MPU 62 is in the open / close execution mode based on the fact that the main MPU 62 has won a big hit as a terminal for externally outputting information to the hall computer HC. The jackpot external terminal 79a used to output the jackpot, and information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode based on the fact that the jackpot winning or lottery winning in the main MPU 62 is selected. An external terminal 79b for the opening / closing execution mode used for the game, an external terminal 79c for the number of games used for outputting information indicating that one game has been completed, and the high / low frequency support in the opening / closing execution mode. An external terminal 79d for display of a villa used to output information indicating any one of the modes; An external terminal 79e for operation used for outputting information indicating that a winning has occurred in either the mouth 33 or the second operating port 34, and information indicating that a predetermined fraud has been detected. An external terminal 79f for fraud detection used for output, an external terminal 79g for payout used to output information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out, and the gaming machine main body 12 An external terminal 79h for opening the main body used for outputting information indicating that the door is being opened, and an exterior for opening the front door used for outputting information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened. And a terminal 79i.

  Note that the types of terminals for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC are not limited to those described above. For example, information indicating that a winning to the special prize winning device 32 has occurred. An external terminal used for output may be provided. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with the external terminal used in order to output the information which shows that the predetermined number of game balls were discharged.

  The MPU 201 of the hall computer HC manages the pachinko machine 10 using signals received through the external terminals 79a to 79i. For example, when it is specified that fraud is detected in the pachinko machine 10, a notification indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal is given to the manager of the game hall. Also, management data for managing the number of prize balls generated in the pachinko machine 10 is created. In addition, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode, the number of consecutive resorts in the opening / closing execution mode when the high-frequency support mode continues, and the number of game balls paid out in the consecutive resorts are totalized, and the total information is externally displayed The external output is output to the external device EX through the electrical wiring group EL2 so that the device 301 can display. Accordingly, the various types of information can be output from the external display device 301. In the configuration in which not only information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out to the hall computer HC but also information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been fired is output from the main MPU 62. The configuration is such that the total number of game balls in one pachinko machine 10 is totaled by the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC and the totaled result is transmitted to the external device EX so that the totalized result is displayed on the external display device 301. Also good.

  An external terminal 79j for serial command data transmission as a terminal for externally outputting information from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX, and each unit data (for example, 1-bit data) included in the command data And a latch signal external terminal 79l for recognizing at least one of transmission start and transmission end of one command. That is, the command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX by serial communication. An external terminal for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided, or a command may be transmitted by parallel communication.

  In the external device EX, a display effect linked with the pachinko machine 10 is performed using commands received through the external terminals 79j to 79l. Such display presentation execution control and information display execution control based on signal reception from the hall computer HC are performed by an external control board 311 incorporated in the external device EX. As shown in FIG. 31A, the external control board 311 includes an external MPU 312 that is an element in which a program ROM 313 and a work RAM 314 are combined into a chip, an external VDP 315, and an external character ROM 316. And an external video RAM 317 are mounted.

  The external MPU 312 analyzes various commands received from the main MPU 62 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the external VDP 315 (specifically, internal commands for the external VDP 315). Generation).

  The program ROM 313 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the external MPU 312 and fixed value data, and a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information It is. The work RAM 314 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the external MPU 312. Sex memory means.

  The external VDP 315 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the external display device 301. Since the external VDP 315 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the external VDP 315 can be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The external side VDP 315 adjusts the timing of the external side MPU 312, the external side video RAM 317, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also stores image data to be stored in the external side video RAM 317. Are read out at a predetermined timing and displayed on the external display device 301.

  The external character ROM 316 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the external display device 301. This external character ROM 316 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The external video RAM 317 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the external display device 301, and the display content of the external display device 301 is changed based on rewriting the content of the external video RAM 317. The

  Here, in the program ROM 313 of the external MPU 312, in addition to a program dedicated to the external device EX and fixed value data for displaying various information on the external display device 301 based on the operation of the external operation unit 302. The program ROM 93 of the display side MPU 92 stores the same program and fixed value data as the program and fixed value data for display control of the effects for game times. The external character ROM 316 stores image data used as an effect for game play out of image data such as various characters stored in the character ROM 96 of the display control device 90. Thereby, based on the display control of the external MPU 312, the external display device 301 can perform the same display effect as the display effect for game times displayed on the symbol display device 41.

<Processing Configuration for Producing Using External Device EX>
Next, a processing configuration for performing an effect using the external device EX will be described.

<External output processing at the start of fluctuation executed by the main MPU 62>
First, the external output process at the start of fluctuation executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the external output process at the start of fluctuation is executed in step S417 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 14).

  In the external output process at the start of fluctuation, first, in step S1701, a lottery for generating an interlocking effect is executed. Specifically, the numerical information is obtained from a random number counter for generation lottery that is a counter provided in the main RAM 64 and whose numerical information is periodically updated (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec). It is determined whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the winning of the linked production. The probability of winning the linked production is 70% if the current game time is a game result that results in a jackpot or jackpot result, and 50 if the game time this time is out of reach and a reach display. If the current game time is a game time that results in an outage that does not cause reach display, it is 10%. In the following step S1702, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery generation in step S1701 is the winning of the linked production. If a negative determination is made in step S1702, the external output process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S 1703, the command correspondence table is read from the main ROM 63. The command correspondence table is table data for identifying an external command at the start of change corresponding to the change command transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 in the current game round. The command correspondence table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the command correspondence table, external commands at the start of variation are set in correspondence with the variation commands on a one-to-one basis. Here, as already described, for the one variation command transmitted from the main MPU 62, the sound light MPU 82 can select a plurality of types of effect patterns based on the result of the notice lottery process. However, common production contents that exist in common exist in the production patterns that can be selected from one variation command. The data of the common effect content is set in the external command at the start of variation. In addition, as described above, the variation command includes lottery result data corresponding to the results of the success / failure determination processing and the distribution determination processing, in addition to the identification data for indicating that it is a variation command. Time data corresponding to the display duration time is set. On the other hand, the lottery result data and the time data are not included in the external command at the start of variation. Therefore, the external command at the start of variation has a small amount of data as well as the variation command, and is specifically 1-byte data. In the external command at the start of change, identification data for indicating that it is an external command at the start of change is set by the upper 4 bits of data, and the above-mentioned common data is set by the lower 4 bits of data. Production contents are set.

  Specifically, for the contents shown in FIG. 32B, an external command at the start of fluctuation of “B1” is set corresponding to the command for fluctuation of “A111”, and the external command at the start of the fluctuation Is set as the data of the contents of common effects, data that can specify the contents of the pseudo-connection and the A special reach. In addition, an external command at the start of change of “B2” is set corresponding to the change command of “A112”, and the external command at the start of change has the contents of C reach as the data of the common effect contents. Data that can be identified is set. In addition, an external command at the start of change of “B3” is set corresponding to the change command of “A113”, and the external command at the start of change has three pseudo-continuations as data of the common effect content. The data that can specify the content is set.

  Returning to the description of the external output process at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 32A), after reading the command correspondence table in step S1703, the contents of the fluctuation command currently output to the sound light side MPU 82 in step S1704. Is identified. Thereafter, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time corresponding to the small hit result, and in step S1706, the high probability mode is in the low frequency support mode. Determine whether or not. As a result of each of the determination processes, if the state is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode and the current game time is a small hit result, the process proceeds to step S1708; otherwise, step S1708 is performed. The process proceeds to S1707.

  In step S1707, the external command at the start of change corresponding to the change command output to the sound light side MPU 82 this time is read from the command correspondence table. On the other hand, in step S1708, the external command at the start of change set to the lower side by one address is used for the command corresponding to the external command at the start of change corresponding to the change command currently output to the sound side MPU 82. Read from the table. Here, in the command correspondence table, the common effect content of the change command set one address lower than one change command is different from the common effect content in the former change command. While being set, the common effect content is effect content that cannot be selected by the sound light side MPU 82 based on the former variation command. Therefore, in step S1708, the external command at the start of change corresponding to the change command whose effect contents do not match the change command transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 in the current game round is selected.

  After executing the process of step S1707 or step S1708, the process proceeds to step S1709, and the external command at the start of change selected in step S1707 or step S1708 is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. Thereafter, the external output process is terminated.

<Game effect production control process executed by external MPU 312>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33, the game turn effect control process executed by the external MPU 312 will be described. Note that the game turning effect control process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not an effect for game times is being executed on the external display device 301. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not an external command at the start of fluctuation is received from the main MPU 62. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, the game turning effect control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, in step S1803, the external command at the start of variation received this time is handled. The data table to be read is read from the program ROM 313 and written to the work RAM 314. Then, the game turn effect control process is terminated.

  By setting the data table in step S1803, an internal command generated in correspondence with the data table is periodically output from the external MPU 312 to the external VDP 315. As a result, image output corresponding to the internal command is executed by the external VDP 315, and an interlocking effect for game times corresponding to the external command at the start of variation is executed in the external display device 301. Note that the image corresponding to the linked effect for the game times will be displayed on the display surface of the external display device 301, but the number of executions in the opening / closing execution mode, the number of consecutive games in the opening / closing execution mode, Images of various types of information such as the number of game times executed and the number of game balls to be paid out are displayed so as not to overlap with the images corresponding to the linked effects for the game times.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not a game turn end signal has been received from the hall computer HC. The game round end signal is transmitted to the hall computer HC in the external output process (step S602) at the end of the fluctuation of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 16) in the main MPU 62, and the hall computer HC transmits the game round end signal. By receiving the signal, a game turn end signal is transmitted to the external device EX corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has received the signal. The game turn end signal may be directly transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX. In this case, the game turn end signal may not be transmitted to the hall computer HC, and may be transmitted. It is good.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the game-turn effect control process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, a game-turning operation in the external display device 301 is performed in step S1805. After ending the linked effects, the game turning effect control process ends. In step S1805, specifically, the data table set in the previous step S1803 is cleared from the work RAM 314, and the demonstration effect data table read from the program ROM 313 is written in the work RAM 314. Thereby, in the external display device 301, the interlocking effect for game times is ended, and the demonstration effect is started.

<Contents of interlocking effects for game times executed by the external device EX>
Next, with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34, the contents of the interlocking consecutive game play executed by the external device EX will be described. FIG. 34 (a) shows a period during which symbols are variably displayed only in the final stop symbol sequence (specifically, symbol sequence Z2) in the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. 34 (b-1) to 34 (b). -4) shows the display content of the external display device 301. FIGS. 34 (c-1), 34 (c-2), 34 (d-1), and 34 (d-2) are symbol display devices. The display content of 41 is shown. In FIGS. 34 (b-1) to (b-4), images other than the interlocking effects for game times are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c), a case where an interlocking effect for game times corresponding to a variation command is executed will be described.

  When the change command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound light MPU 82 and the external command at the start of change is externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external MPU 312, FIG. 34 (c-1). As shown in FIG. 34, the variation display of symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 is started, and an interlocking effect for game times is started in the external display device 301 as shown in FIG. 34 (b-1). Is done.

  In this case, in the symbol display device 41, after the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 34 (c-2), the reach effect using the first character CH1 as the reach character is started. In the display device 301, as shown in FIGS. 34 (b-1) and 34 (b-2), the timing before the timing t 1, specifically, the start timing of the interlocking effects for game times, as shown in FIGS. A notice effect using one character CH1 is started. And after the timing of t1, as shown in FIG.34 (b-3), FIG.34 (b-4), and FIG.34 (c-2), in both the external display apparatus 301 and the symbol display apparatus 41, it is 1st. An effect using one character CH1 is performed. Note that the external display device 301 displays a moving image in which the first character CH1 advances in a predetermined direction from the start timing of the linked effects for the game times. The first character CH1 is displayed in the game times. Will be displayed on the external display device 301 until the process ends.

  As described above, the first character CH1 is displayed on the external display device 301 at a timing prior to the timing t1, so that a reach effect using the first character CH1 is generated on the symbol display device 41. This can be notified in advance. Thereby, the player can grasp the contents of the effect generated in the symbol display device 41 in advance by checking the external display device 301, and can increase the expectation for the occurrence of the jackpot result. It becomes.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 (a), 34 (b), and 34 (d), a description will be given of a case where an interlocking effect for game times that does not correspond to the change command is executed.

  When the change command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound light MPU 82 and the external command at the start of change is externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external MPU 312, FIG. 34 (d-1). As shown in FIG. 34, the variation display of symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 is started, and an interlocking effect for game times is started in the external display device 301 as shown in FIG. 34 (b-1). Is done.

  In this case, the external display device 301 starts an interlocking effect using the first character CH1, but after the timing t1, the symbol display device 41 does not start the effect using the first character CH1, but instead. An effect using the second character CH2 different from the first character CH1 is started. In the symbol display device 41, the first character CH1 is not displayed at all. And in this game round, the presentation using the 1st character CH1 is performed in the external display apparatus 301 over the whole after the timing of t1, and the presentation using the 2nd character CH2 is performed in the symbol display apparatus 41. .

  As described above, the effect character displayed on the symbol display device 41 is different from the character displayed as a notice on the external display device 301, so that the player recognizes that there is some disagreement. . The mismatch between the characters occurs in a state where the player is in the high probability mode and in the low frequency support mode, that is, in a situation where the player is not clearly informed that the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the high probability mode is internally used by using the linked effect, and to increase the player's attention to the effect content in the external display device 301. Is possible.

  In addition, the above-described character mismatch occurs when a small hit result is obtained in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage for the player that the small hit result is obtained.

<External output setting process at the start of bonus executed by main MPU 62>
Next, the external output setting process at the start of bonus executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output setting process at the start of the bonus is executed in step S611 in the special figure determination process (FIG. 16).

  In the external output setting process at the start of the bonus, first, various signals are set to the HI level in step S1901. Specifically, among signals transmitted to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 79, a signal output through the external terminal 79a for jackpot, a signal output through the external terminal 79b for opening / closing execution mode, The signal output through the external terminal 79d for display is set to the HI level.

  In a succeeding step S1902, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the external output setting process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, reproduction lottery processing is executed. Specifically, the numerical information is obtained from a random number counter for reproduction lottery, which is a counter provided in the main-side RAM 64 and whose numerical information is periodically updated (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec). It is determined whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the winning of the reproduction effect. The probability of winning the reproduction effect is 50% when a premium character does not appear in the previous game round, and 80% when a premium character appears in the previous game round. . In the subsequent step S1904, it is determined whether or not the result of the reproduction lottery process in step S1903 is a winning of the reproduction effect. If a negative determination is made in step S1904, the external output setting process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905.

  In step S1905, the change command transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 in the immediately preceding game round is read, and in the subsequent step S1906, the read change command is transmitted to the external apparatus EX by serial communication. Thereafter, the external output setting process is terminated. In the change command corresponding to the appearance of the premium character, the premium character is set as common production content. That is, when the change command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82, the premium character is displayed on the symbol display device 41 regardless of the result of the notice lottery process in the sound light side MPU 82.

<External output setting process at the end of bonus executed by main MPU 62>
Next, the external output setting process at the end of the bonus executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output setting process at the end of the bonus is executed in step S903 in the special electricity end process (FIG. 19).

  In the external output setting process at the end of the bonus, first, in step S2001, various signals are set to the LOW level. Specifically, among signals transmitted to the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 79, a signal output through the jackpot external terminal 79a and a signal output through the open / close execution mode external terminal 79b are LOW. Set to level. When the low-frequency support mode is entered after the current opening / closing execution mode ends, the signal output through the external display 79d is set to the LOW level.

  When the high frequency support mode is entered instead of the low frequency support mode after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode, the signal output through the external display 79d is maintained at the HI level. In this case, the signal is set to the LOW level in step S803 or step S809 in the mode transition process (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62.

  In the subsequent step S2002, it corresponds to the type of the ending command transmitted to the sound-side MPU 82 in the immediately preceding ending command output process (FIG. 26) in the special electricity closing process (step S311) of the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 13). A command corresponding to the number of times is read from the main ROM 63. That is, when the first ending command is transmitted, the first number corresponding command is read. When the second ending command is transmitted, the second number corresponding command is read and the third ending command is transmitted. If the fourth ending command is transmitted, the fourth number corresponding command is read. If the fifth ending command is transmitted, the fifth number corresponding command is read. When the 6th ending command is transmitted, the 6th command is read, when the 7th ending command is transmitted, the 7th command is read and the 8th ending command is transmitted. If so, read the 8th command and send an explicit ending command. Reads an explicit number of times corresponding command in the case that. In the subsequent step S2003, the read number correspondence command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. Thereafter, the external output setting process is terminated.

<Bonus effect control process executed by external MPU 312>
Next, the bonus effect control process executed by the external MPU 312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the bonus effect control process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a bonus effect is being executed on the external display device 301. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2102 whether the winning signal received from the hall computer HC is at the HI level. As already described, the pachinko machine 10 uses the jackpot signal through the jackpot external terminal 79a and the switch execution mode signal through the jackboard mode external terminal 79b as signals indicating that the switchboard execution mode is in effect. Can be transmitted. On the other hand, the hall computer HC receives only a desired signal among the jackpot signal and the open / close execution mode signal by selecting the electrically connected side of the external terminals 79a and 79b. In this way, it is possible to manage the number of times of the desired side among the number of times that the jackpot result and the number of times that the opening / closing execution mode has been entered while suppressing the number of input terminals on the Hall computer HC side. Under such circumstances, a signal on the side selected in the hall computer HC is transmitted from the hall computer HC to the external device EX. Therefore, in step S2102, it is determined whether or not the signal on the side where electrical connection is selected in the hall computer HC among the jackpot signal and the open / close execution mode signal is at the HI level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the bonus effect control process is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether a change command is received from the main MPU 62 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2103, a data table for normal bonus effects is read from the program ROM 313 and written to the work RAM 314 in step S2104.

  By setting the data table in step S2104, an internal command corresponding to the data table is generated and periodically output from the external MPU 312 to the external VDP 315. As a result, image output corresponding to the internal command is executed by the external VDP 315, and a normal bonus effect is executed by the external display device 301. The image corresponding to the normal bonus effect is displayed on the display screen of the external display device 301. However, the number of executions in the opening / closing execution mode, the number of consecutive games in the opening / closing execution mode, and the game times after the opening / closing execution mode. Images of various types of information such as the number of executions and the number of game balls paid out are displayed so as not to overlap with the image corresponding to the normal bonus effect.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, a data table for game times corresponding to the change command is read from the program ROM 313 and written in the work RAM 314 in step S2105. At this time, the normal bonus effect data table used after the display effect execution control using the game data table is also read and written in the work RAM 314.

  When the data table is set in step S2105, an internal command corresponding to the data table is generated and periodically output from the external MPU 312 to the external VDP 315. As a result, image output corresponding to the internal command is executed by the external VDP 315, and the game display reproduction effect corresponding to the contents of the command for change is executed in the external display device 301. The game time reproduction effect is an effect in which the display effect for the game time executed by the symbol display device 41 in the game time immediately before the current opening / closing execution mode is reproduced by the external display device 301. That is. As described above, when the game time reproduction effect is executed by the external display device 301, the player overlooks the display effect executed by the symbol display device 41 during the game time that is a trigger for the opening / closing execution mode. Even if it is, it becomes possible to provide the player with an opportunity to confirm it. In addition, it is possible to provide an opportunity for a player who wants to reaffirm the effect of the game times that has become a trigger for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and soak in a sense of superiority.

  However, in this reproduction effect, the effect for game times is reproduced up to the content of the effect that can be specified from the content of the command for change. Specifically, since the lottery process for the notice effect is executed by the sound light side MPU 82, the contents of the notice effect cannot be specified from the change command. In addition, since the type of symbol that is finally stopped and displayed at the end of the game time on the symbol display device 41 is determined by lottery in the sound side MPU 82, the content of the final symbol can be specified from the change command. Can not. On the other hand, the result of the determination, the result of the allocation determination, the display duration of the game times, and the type of the common effect content can be specified from the change command. Therefore, in the reproduction effect, the effect is executed over the display duration time of the immediately preceding game times, and the common effect such as the reach effect generated in the immediately preceding game times is also executed, and finally stopped and displayed. The symbol type may correspond to the result of the success / failure determination and the result of the allocation determination, but the symbol type may not match that of the previous game round, and the notice effect There is also a possibility that the content of is not consistent with the previous game times. In this reproduction effect, the final stop symbol may not be displayed, and the notice effect may not be executed.

  Further, in a situation where a reproduction effect is being executed on the external display device 301, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is being executed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, sound corresponding to the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode is output from the speaker unit 54 of the pachinko machine 10, and the external device EX is not provided with a function for outputting sound. Therefore, when executing the reproduction effect, the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is reproduced among the effects for the game times, and the sound output effect on the speaker unit 54 is not reproduced. The same applies to the light emission effect in the display light emitting unit 53.

  The image corresponding to the reproduction of the game times is displayed on the display screen of the external display device 301. However, the number of executions in the opening / closing execution mode, the number of consecutive games in the opening / closing execution mode, and the game after the opening / closing execution mode. Images of various types of information such as the number of times of execution and the number of game balls to be paid out are displayed so as not to overlap with the image corresponding to the reproduction effect of the game times.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, in step S2106, the signal on the side where electrical connection is selected in the hall computer HC among the jackpot signal and the open / close execution mode signal becomes the LOW level. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, bonus effect end processing is executed in step S2107. Specifically, the data table set in step S2104 or step S2105 is cleared from the work RAM 314, and the demonstration effect data table read from the program ROM 313 is written into the work RAM 314. Thereby, in the external display device 301, the bonus effect is ended and the demonstration effect is started.

  When the process of step S2104, step S2105, or step S2107 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S2106, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether or not a command corresponding to the number of times is received from the main MPU 62. If the command corresponding to the number of times is not received, the bonus effect control process is terminated as it is, and if the command corresponding to the number of times is received, the process proceeds to step S2109.

  In step S2109, the lottery table corresponding to the number-of-times corresponding command received this time is read from the program ROM 313. The lottery table has the same configuration as the lottery table used in the lottery process in the display mode executed in steps S1502 to S1504 of the ending correspondence process (FIG. 27) in the sound light side MPU 82. Stored in the ROM 313 in advance. In step S2109, when the first number corresponding command is received, the same lottery table as that for the first ending command is read, and when the second number corresponding command is received, the second ending command is read. If the same lottery table as in the above case is read and the third number corresponding command is received, the same lottery table as in the case of the third ending command is read and if the fourth number corresponding command is received. The same lottery table as in the case of the fourth ending command is read, and when the fifth number corresponding command is received, the same lottery table as in the case of the fifth ending command is read and the sixth number corresponding command is received. If there is, the same lottery table as the sixth ending command is read out, When receiving the command reads the same lottery table and the seventh ending command, when receiving the eighth count corresponding command reads the same lottery table as in the eighth ending command.

  In a succeeding step S2110, a lottery process in the display mode is executed. In the display mode lottery process, numerical information is acquired from an external random number counter that is a counter provided in the work RAM 314 and whose numerical information is periodically updated (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). Is compared with the lottery table read in step S2109 to select the display mode. In step S2111, the selected display mode is set as a future display mode. The types of the display modes are the same as the types of the display modes selected in the sound light side MPU 82, and specifically, six types of the first display mode to the sixth display mode are set. Further, the selection rate of each display mode in each lottery table is the same as that in the lottery table referred to by the sound light side MPU 82 (see FIG. 28). By executing the display mode setting process in step S2111, the external display device 301 displays an image corresponding to the set display mode. This type of image has a one-to-one correspondence with the display mode, and by confirming the external display device 301, it is possible to recognize which display mode is selected in the external device EX.

  When the explicit count correspondence command is received, the explicit display mode is set instead of the processing of steps S2109 to S2111. Also, the display according to the display mode on the external display device 301 is changed to the normal mode display when the high frequency support mode ends if the high frequency support mode is in progress, and the game is displayed if the low frequency support mode is in progress. When the number of times is executed 20 times, the display is changed to the normal mode.

<Looking at the replay of game times>
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a description will be given of how the game display reproduction effect is performed on the external display device 301. FIG. FIG. 37 (a) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, FIG. 37 (b) shows the execution period of the game times reproduction effect, and FIGS. 37 (c-1) to 37 (c-). 3) shows the display content of the external display device 301 when the game stage reproduction effect is executed, FIG. 37 (d) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, and FIG. 37 (e). Indicates the display content of the external display device 301 when only the normal bonus effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode continues for at least the duration T1 of the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, an opening period (for example, 4 sec), and the number of round games executed (for example, 15) for a period (for example, 5.4 sec) obtained by integrating the upper limit number of round games and the launch period of game balls In addition, it continues at least over the total period of the interval period between round games (for example, 28 sec) and the ending period (for example, 6 sec). This continuation period T1 is longer than the longest display continuation time T2 that can be selected in the game times. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, the entire game play effect is displayed on the external display device 301 no matter what game play effect is executed in the immediately preceding game play. It can be reproduced.

  Further, the duration T1 of the high-frequency winning mode is set longer than the display duration T2 that can be selected in the game times. Correspondingly, in the external display device 301, for example, when the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is started in the pachinko machine 10 at the timing of t11, the opening / closing execution of the high-frequency winning mode is performed until the timing of t21 after a predetermined period. A display effect indicating that the mode is started is performed, and a reproduction effect of the game times is started at the timing of t21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37 (c-1), the symbol display on the external display device 301 is started in the same manner as the symbol display for game times on the symbol display device 41. . Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (c-2), the reach display similar to the reach effect performed on the symbol display device 41 in the immediately preceding game round is performed on the external display device 301. Thereafter, at the timing t22 when the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is continued, the game time reproduction effect is ended. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37 (c-3), a normal bonus effect is started on the external display device 301 from the timing t22. Then, at the timing of t12 thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37A, the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is terminated. In this case, the normal bonus effect in the external display device 301 is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the shortest duration T3 is shorter than the continuous duration T1 of the high-frequency winning mode and shorter than the longest display duration T2 that can be selected in the game times. Accordingly, when the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is entered, a normal bonus effect is started on the external display device 301 as shown in FIG. 37 (e) from the start timing t31. Then, the normal bonus effect is continued over the timing t32 which is the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode.

<Rendering for predicting the end reference count for high probability mode>
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a description will be given of how the design display device 41 and the external display device 301 each provide an effect for predicting the end reference count of the high probability mode. FIG. 38A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which an effect for predicting the end reference count of the high probability mode is performed on the external display device 301, and FIG. 38B is a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the effect for predicting the completion | finish reference | standard frequency | count of high probability mode is performed at 41. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, the external display device 301 displays the characters “Expect Long Continue” as an effect for predicting the end reference count of the high probability mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 38B, the symbol display device 41 displays the characters “Expect middle continuation or higher” as an effect for predicting the end reference count of the high probability mode. It should be noted that the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is displayed on each of the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 (specifically, the characters “continuation frequency 5 times”).

  As described above, the effect for predicting the end reference number of times of the high probability mode is executed in each of the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. Further, lottery processing for determining the contents of the effects is performed individually. Thereby, the player can refer to a plurality of types of information when predicting the end reference number of times of the high probability mode, and can perform advanced prediction.

  In the configuration in which the external display device 301 performs display corresponding to the end reference count in the high probability mode, the end reference count is not displayed as it is, but the expectation level is displayed for the end reference count. Even if some kind of communication abnormality occurs in the communication path from the main MPU 62 to the external display device 301, inconvenience hardly occurs.

  According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  The main side MPU 62 outputs a command corresponding to the contents of the effect for the game times to the external device EX. Then, in the external display device 301 of the external device EX, an effect corresponding to the command is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the production related to each other beyond the frame of the pachinko machine 10 alone. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  The main MPU 62 externally outputs an external command at the start of the fluctuation at a timing before the effect contents of the effect for the game times become the contents corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure. As a result, in a situation where an effect for game times is being executed on the symbol display device 41 or the like, an effect corresponding to the effect for game times can be executed on the external display device 301. In addition, since the external command at the start of fluctuation does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the determination, it is possible to suppress an act of misusing the result of illegally reading the external command at the start of fluctuation. Become. In addition, it is possible to prevent the determination result from being displayed on the external display device 301 before being displayed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The external command at the start of fluctuation does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the determination of success or failure but also information that specifies the type of the hit result. As a result, it is possible to suppress an act of misusing the result of illegally reading the external command at the start of fluctuation. Further, it is possible to prevent the type of hit result from being displayed on the external display device 301 before being displayed on the pachinko machine 10.

  The external command at the start of the change does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the determination of success or failure but also information that clearly indicates the display duration of the game times. As a result, the types of external commands at the start of fluctuation can be reduced, and the configuration for outputting the external command at the start of fluctuation can be simplified. On the other hand, when the game-playing effect is ended in the pachinko machine 10, a signal indicating the end is output to the outside. As a result, even if the display continuation time information is not included in the external command at the start of variation, the external device EX can recognize that the effect for the game round has ended.

  Since the external command at the start of fluctuation includes information corresponding to a part of the production range among the production ranges included in the effect for game play, the production corresponding to the part of the production range is excluded. It can be executed by the attached display device 301. In addition, since it is a configuration that outputs information corresponding to a part of the production range, rather than outputting the entire effect for the game times, it becomes possible to reduce the types of external commands at the start of fluctuation, It is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting an external command at the start of fluctuation.

  One external command at the start of variation is common to a plurality of types of effects for game times. As a result, the types of external commands at the start of fluctuation can be reduced, and the configuration for outputting the external command at the start of fluctuation can be simplified.

  The sound light side MPU 82 is configured to execute a notice lottery process when a variation command is received from the main MPU 62 and derive an effect pattern corresponding to the lottery result. A pattern can be derived. In this case, the external command at the start of the change includes information that clearly indicates the contents of the effect executed in common in the effect pattern that can be derived from the one change command. Thereby, even in a situation where the entire contents of the effect for the game times are not determined, an external command at the start of variation is output so that the effect corresponding to the effect for the game times can be executed. It becomes possible. Therefore, the degree of freedom with respect to the output timing of the external command at the start of the fluctuation is improved, and the design for the configuration for outputting the external command at the start of the fluctuation can be facilitated.

  The external command at the start of variation corresponds to the variation command on a one-to-one basis. As a result, even if an external command at the start of variation is output in a situation in which the entire contents of the effects for the game round are not determined, the effects on the external display device 301 are displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and It is possible to correspond to an effect for game times executed in the speaker unit 54.

  An external command at the start of fluctuation is output from the main MPU 62 to the outside. As a result, the main MPU 62 that controls the progress of the game performs the function of outputting an external command at the start of fluctuation, and thus the function of managing the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be integrated into the main MPU 62.

  The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 stores in advance data for defining the correspondence between the change command and the external command at the start of change. Thereby, the main side MPU 62 can uniquely read out the external command at the start of the change from the change command transmitted to the sound side MPU 82, and the processing configuration for outputting the external command at the start of the change Is simplified.

  The main MPU 62 externally outputs a variation command corresponding to the game turn effect to the external device EX after the game turn effect is started. Then, in the external display device 301, an effect corresponding to the received change command is executed. As a result, even if the player misses the effect for the game times, it is possible to provide the player again with an opportunity to confirm the effect corresponding to the effect for the game times.

  When the main MPU 62 externally outputs a variation command corresponding to a game-turn effect to the external device EX, the main-side MPU 62 outputs the change command to the outside after the game-turn effect is finished. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the reproduction effect on the external display device 301 and the effect for game times on the symbol display device 41 from overlapping in time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to each effect.

  By using the change command as it is as a command for executing the reproduction effect in the external apparatus EX, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated command for executing the reproduction effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the types of commands required in the main MPU 62.

  When starting an effect for game play, the main MPU 62 not only determines the result of the determination, but also determines the result of the determination and the result of the distribution determination, as well as the change command including the information on the determination result and the display duration time. The type command including the information is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. As a result, the sound light side MPU 82 can carefully check the determination result and the result of the distribution determination. In this case, only the change command is output to the outside in order to execute the reproduction effect, and the type command is not output. As a result, the amount of information output from the main MPU 62 can be suppressed while allowing the external display device 301 to execute a reproduction effect.

  In addition to the external command at the start of change, the change command is also output from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX. As a result, it is possible to consolidate the function of outputting to the external device EX to the main MPU 62 that controls the progress of the game.

  The reproduction effect in the external display device 301 is performed in a state where the opening / closing execution mode is executed in the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game during the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the reproduction effect performed by the external display device 301 corresponds to the effect for game times performed before the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The reproduction effect on the external display device 301 is performed in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is executing the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, and is not performed in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode is being executed. . As a result, the reproduction effect can be performed only when the period for performing the reproduction effect is ensured, and the reproduction effect can be executed without difficulty.

  When a small hit result is obtained in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the content of the effect on the external display device 301 by the output of the external command at the start of fluctuation, and the design display device 41 A situation may occur in which the content of the effect for game times does not match. Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not the state is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode by confirming the correspondence relationship between the two effects in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. It becomes possible to predict, and it becomes possible to make a player pay attention to both the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  By changing the type of external command at the start of fluctuation output externally to the external device EX, the contents of both effects in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 are not matched. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the contents of both effects do not match as described above, while not affecting the contents of the effects for game times in the symbol display device 41. In particular, the sound light side MPU 82 determines the display duration of the game times in accordance with the changing command received from the main side MPU 62 and further determines the contents of the effects for the game times, so that it is difficult to change the contents of the effects. On the other hand, by responding by changing the type of external command at the start of fluctuation, the degree of freedom of the change mode is increased when the contents of both effects are not matched, and the correspondence between both effects is favorable. It becomes possible to change to.

  Since the disagreement between the contents of the two effects in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 is triggered by the small hit result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the timing at which the disagreement can occur. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's advantage of being a small hit result, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for a small hit result.

  In the external display device 301, an effect is provided in which the type of reach effect in the symbol display device 41 is notified in advance according to the content of the external command at the start of fluctuation. In this case, if there is a discrepancy between the contents of both effects in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301, the content of the prior notification in the external display device 301 does not match the type of reach effect in the symbol display device 41. It becomes like this. This not only notifies the player that the mode is the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, but also makes it possible to give the player an unexpectedness in the notification, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The external terminal plate 79 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 79a to 79l. Of these, the external terminals 79a to 79i are terminals for outputting signals corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the outside. Is output externally using one terminal. On the other hand, the remaining external terminals 79j to 79l are terminals for externally outputting a command corresponding to the performance of the pachinko machine 10, and the command is externally output using a plurality of terminals. Thus, since the number of terminals for externally outputting the state of the pachinko machine 10 is one terminal, even if there are a plurality of states of the pachinko machine 10 to be externally output, the external output is output. It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the configuration of communication for performing. On the other hand, since there are a plurality of terminals for externally outputting the information corresponding to the contents of the production, it is possible to output the information as a command. Thereby, it is possible to flexibly cope with diversification of types of information output to the outside.

  In the configuration in which the high probability mode ends when the game times corresponding to the end reference number have been consumed, a plurality of types of end reference times are set. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting not only the high probability mode but also the high probability mode with a larger number of end reference times. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  A plurality of types of end reference counts for the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set. As a result, the player is expected not only to be in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, but also to be in the high probability mode of the higher number of end reference times and the high frequency support mode. While playing games. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the state that is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, there is a state in which the number of end reference times is smaller than the state that is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. As a result, the advantage of the jackpot result that is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode can be increased, and the expectation that the jackpot result will be generated can be increased.

  If the result is an implicit high-probability jackpot in the low-frequency support mode, then it shifts to the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode, while the high-frequency support mode results in an implicit high-probability jackpot. In this case, in the configuration in which the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are subsequently entered, the end reference count when the non-explicit high-accuracy big hit result is larger than the advantageous big hit result A and the advantageous big hit result B There are many times. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that an implicit high probability hit result will occur.

  In the symbol display device 41, the expected degree of the end reference number is notified according to the type of display mode. Thereby, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that a large number of end reference times have been selected.

  Notification of the expected end count is performed not only on the symbol display device 41 but also on the external display device 301. Thus, the player expects that a larger number of end reference times will be selected while confirming both the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. In addition, the lottery for determining the notification content of the expectation level in the symbol display device 41 and the lottery for determining the notification content of the expectation level in the external display device 301 are performed separately. As a result, there are a plurality of types of information for predicting the end reference count, and the player can perform advanced prediction.

  The number-of-times corresponding command output externally from the main MPU 62 in order to notify the expected degree of the end reference number in the external display device 301 does not include information specifying the end reference number. As a result, it is possible to prevent the end reference number from being displayed as it is on the external display device 301. Therefore, for example, even if a communication abnormality occurs with respect to the output of the number corresponding command, it is possible to prevent the abnormal end reference number from being specified, and it is difficult to confuse the player. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that the end reference number is clearly indicated in the external display device 301 even though the end reference number is not clearly indicated in the pachinko machine 10.

  The command corresponding to the number of times is output externally after the contents corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure are displayed on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the external device EX from informing that the jackpot result will be notified prior to the pachinko machine 10.

  From the main MPU 62, the external command at the start of the change and the change command are output to the external device EX at different timings with respect to the effect for one game round. Then, in the external display device 301, an effect corresponding to each command, which is an effect corresponding to the effect for the game times, is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each timing on the external display device 301, and it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect executed on the external display device 301.

  Of the commands output externally to the external device EX, the variation command contains more information regarding the effects for game times than the external command at the start of variation. As a result, when a plurality of types of effects are performed in the external display device 301 with respect to an effect for a single game, the contents of the effects of each effect can be greatly varied.

  The external command at the start of the change does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the determination, but the change command that is output externally after the content corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed. Information that clearly indicates the result of the determination is included. As a result, it is difficult for the external display device 301 to clearly execute the result of the determination of the success / failure at the former timing, and it is possible to execute the effect that can clearly indicate the result of the determination of the success / failure at the latter timing. It becomes.

<Second Embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the configuration for transmitting a command to the external device EX is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, an electrical configuration for performing communication among the pachinko machine 10, the external device EX, and the hall computer HC will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the main MPU 62 can transmit various signals to the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC through the external terminal plate 79. The type of signal transmitted to the hall computer HC is the same as that in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, the main MPU 62 does not transmit a command to the external device EX. Instead, the sound light side MPU 82 can transmit a command to the external device EX through the external terminal plate 79. The transmission of this command is performed by serial communication in the same manner as in the case where the main MPU 62 transmits a command to the external device EX in the first embodiment.

  Here, the sound light side MPU 82 transmits a command to the display side MPU 92 by serial communication, as in the first embodiment. In this case, the communication method of serial communication from the sound light side MPU 82 to the external device EX is the same as the communication method of serial communication from the sound light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92. That is, as a signal line group for transmitting a command from the sound light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92, a command data transmission signal line, a clock signal signal line, and a latch signal signal line are provided. However, as a signal line group for transmitting a command from the sound light side MPU 82 to the external device EX, a signal line for transmitting command data, a signal line for a clock signal, and a signal line for a latch signal Is provided. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 82 can transmit the same command as the command transmitted to the display side MPU 92 to the external device EX, and can directly use the data configuration for transmitting the command. It becomes.

  Next, main-side command response processing executed by the sound-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the main-side command handling process, it is first determined in step S2201 whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main-side MPU 62. If these commands have been received, a lottery for generating a linked effect is executed in step S2202, and in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the result of the generated lottery is a winner for generating a linked effect. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the command correspondence table is read from the sound-side ROM 83 in step S2204, and the command corresponding to the variation command received this time is started to vary from the command correspondence table in step S2205. In step S2206, the read external command at the start of fluctuation is transmitted to the external apparatus EX by serial communication. The processing contents of these steps S2202 to S2206 are the same as steps S1701 to S1703, S1707, and S1709 in the external output process at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 32) executed by the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment. It is the same.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the external command at the start of fluctuation is not transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX, but is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 82 to the external device EX. Accordingly, the command correspondence table stored in the main ROM 63 in the first embodiment is stored in the sound light ROM 83. As in the first embodiment, in the state of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the change command is used in a game time in which a predetermined event occurs such as a game result of a small hit result. A configuration may be adopted in which an external command at the start of unsupported fluctuation is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 82 to the external device EX.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, or if the process of step S2206 is executed, a stop result command and pattern command determination process is executed in step S2207. In this process, the same processes as steps S1203 to S1207 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed. In the subsequent step S2208, the stop result command and the pattern command determined in step S2207 are stored in the sound light side RAM 84. Thereafter, in step S2209, the stop result command and the pattern command determined in step S2207 are transmitted to the display side MPU 92.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2201, or after the processing of step S2209 is executed, it is determined in step S2210 whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If an opening command has been received, an opening handling process is executed in step S2211, and in step S2212, the opening command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 92. The processing content of these step S2211 and step S2212 is the same as that of step S1212 and step S1213 of the main side command response processing (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S2213, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2213, a reproduction lottery process is executed in step S2214, and it is determined in step S2215 whether or not a reproduction win has been achieved. In the case of winning the reproduction, in step S2216, the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in the game round immediately before the current open / close execution mode are transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication, A first opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. Thereby, the external MPU 312 starts the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode on the external display device 301, and the effect performed on the symbol display device 41 in the immediately preceding game round after the opening effect ends. The external display device 301 is display-controlled so that the game display reproduction effect is performed on the external display device 301.

  In particular, since the stop result command and the pattern command based on the contents of the notice lottery process and the stop symbol determination process are output externally instead of the change command, the external MPU 312 has the symbol display device 41 It is possible to specify the entire contents of the effect for the executed game times. Therefore, in the reproduction effect, it is possible to reproduce an effect having exactly the same content as the effect for game times executed on the symbol display device 41.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2213 or a negative determination is made in step S2215, the second opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication in step S2217. As a result, the external MPU 312 controls the display of the external display device 301 so that the normal bonus effect is performed.

  When the processing in step S2216 or step S2217 is executed, the other main processing is executed in step S2218, and then the main command processing is terminated. In the other processing, processing similar to that in steps S1209 to S1210 and steps S1214 to S1228 of the main-side command handling processing (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, display side command handling processing executed by the sound light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The display side command handling process is executed in step S1104 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21).

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether a specific character exit command has been received from the display-side MPU 92 or not. The exit command for the specific character is transmitted from the display-side MPU 92 to the sound-light-side MPU 82 at a timing during the execution of the predetermined game turn effect. The predetermined game-playing effect is an effect in which the specific character is variably displayed until a midway timing on the symbol display device 41. The timing at which the exit command for the specific character is transmitted is displayed on the symbol display device 41. It is the timing when it is not done. If an exit command has been received, in step S2302, the exit command is externally output to the external device EX via serial communication.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2301, or if the process of step S2302 is executed, the display side command handling process is terminated after other processes are executed in step S2303. In the other processing, processing corresponding to another command transmitted from the display side MPU 92 is executed.

  Next, the specific character effect control process executed by the external MPU 312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The production control process is started periodically (for example, at a period of 2 msec) in the external MPU 312.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether an exit command is received from the sound light side MPU 82 or not. If the exit command has not been received, the effect control process is terminated, and if the exit command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2402.

  In step S2402, the effect table for the specific character is read from the program ROM 313 and written in the work RAM 314, and then the effect control process ends. As a result, the external MPU 312 outputs an internal command to the external VDP 315 every time the image update timing is reached according to the specific character effect table. An output using a specific character is performed on the external display device 301 by outputting a signal according to the internal command in the external VDP 315.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a description will be given of how an effect using a specific character is performed in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. FIG.

  42 (a) shows the execution period of the game turn effect on the symbol display device 41, FIG. 42 (b) shows the execution period of the specific character effect on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 42 (c) shows the external display. FIG. 42 (d) shows the execution period of the specific character effect on the external display device 301. 42A and 42B show a state in which a specific character effect is being executed on the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. FIG.

  By starting the game times at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (c), the effect for game times is started in each of the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301. The Thereafter, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 42B, the specific character effect is started in the symbol display device 41. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42A, the specific character CH3 is variably displayed in a state where the symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the specific character CH3 is not displayed on the external display device 301.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the specific character effect in the symbol display device 41 is terminated and the specific character CH3 disappears from the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 42 (d). In this manner, the specific character effect on the external display device 301 is started and the specific character CH3 appears on the external display device 301. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42B, the specific character CH3 is variably displayed on the external display device 301. In this case, the symbol display is continued in the symbol display device 41, but the specific character CH3 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42D, the specific character effect in the external display device 301 is terminated at the timing of t4, and as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42C at the subsequent timing of t5. As described above, the game turn effect in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 is ended.

  Note that the game times in which the specific character CH3 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 are higher in the expected switching to the opening / closing execution mode and the expected generation of reach than the game times in which the specific character CH3 is not displayed. The winning probability of production is set. The game times in which the specific character CH3 is displayed on the external display device 301 after the specific character CH3 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 are displayed on the symbol display device 41 and specified on the external display device 301. The winning probability of production is set so that the degree of expectation of transition to the opening / closing execution mode and the expectation of the occurrence of reach are higher than the game times when the character CH3 is not displayed.

  According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  A command for causing the external device EX to execute an effect corresponding to the effect for game play is output from the sound light side MPU 82 instead of from the main side MPU 62. As a result, the processing load on the main MPU 62 can be reduced. In addition, although the main MPU 62 determines the contents of the outline of the effects for game times, the details of the effects of the effects for game times are determined by the sound light side MPU 82. In this case, by outputting the command to the external device EX by the sound light side MPU 82, the command can be output so that the entire contents of the effect for the game times can be specified. It becomes possible. Therefore, the external display device 301 can perform an effect related to the entire contents of the effect for game times.

  As a command for executing the reproduction effect in the external display device 301, the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92 when the immediately preceding game round is started are output. As a result, not only the result of the success / failure determination included in the variation command, the result of the distribution determination and the display duration, but also the content of the notice lottery process and the content of the stop symbol determination process executed in the sound side MPU 82 are supported. The command can be externally output to the external device EX, and in the reproduction effect, it is possible to reproduce the same content as the content of the effect for the game round executed immediately before.

  Further, since the stop result command and the pattern command are output as they are as described above, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated command for executing the reproduction effect. Therefore, the types of commands can be reduced.

  In the configuration in which the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted from the sound light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92 by serial communication, the stop result command and the pattern command are externally output by serial communication from the sound light side MPU 82 to the external device EX. . Accordingly, it is possible to output the stop result command and the pattern command to the outside using the processing configuration for transmitting the command to the display side MPU 92. Therefore, the processing configuration for outputting the command to the outside can be simplified.

  In response to the timing at which the specific character CH3 is no longer displayed on the symbol display device 41, an exit command is externally output from the sound side MPU 82 to the external device EX, and the exit command is externally output on the external display device 301. At the same time, display of the specific character CH3 is started. Thereby, it is possible to perform effects related to each other as if the specific character CH3 is moving between the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301, and the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 are provided. It becomes possible to raise the player's attention to both of the above. Further, since the exit command is output from the sound-side MPU 82 that controls the execution of the performance rather than the main MPU 62, it is easy to specify the output timing of the exit command, and the configuration for performing the external output is simplified. Is planned.

  In the configuration in which the command corresponding to the content of the effect is output from the sound light side MPU 82 as described above, the signal corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 is output from the main side MPU 62 to the outside. As a result, the main body of external output can be distributed according to the functions of the MPUs 62 and 82, and external output can be suitably performed.

  The same external terminal plate 79 is used regardless of whether the main MPU 62 performs external output or the sound light MPU 82 performs external output. As a result, it is possible to collect the points for outputting information to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 on the external terminal board 79, and it is easy to perform wiring work for external output.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment and the second embodiment, both the main MPU 62 and the sound light side MPU 82 transmit signals to the external device EX. However, the sound light side MPU 82 transmits a command to the external device EX by serial communication as in the second embodiment, whereas the main side MPU 62 does not transmit a command to the external device EX. A variation start signal is transmitted using a single signal line. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for outputting a signal to the external device EX in the main side MPU 62 and the sound light side MPU 82 will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, an external output process at the start of fluctuation executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2501, a lottery for generating a linked effect is executed, and in subsequent step S2502, it is determined whether the result of the generated lottery is a winning for generating a linked effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2502, the external output process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2503.

  In step S2503, the command correspondence table is read from the main ROM 63, and in the subsequent step S2504, the contents of the change command output this time to the sound light side MPU 82 are specified. Thereafter, in step S2505, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time corresponding to the small hit result. In step S2506, whether the current game time is in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Determine whether or not. As a result of each of the determination processes, if the state is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode and the current game round is a small hit result, the process proceeds to step S2508; otherwise, step S2508 is performed. The process proceeds to S2507.

  The processing content of steps S2501 to S2506 is the same as that of steps S1701 to S1706 of the external output processing (FIG. 32) at the start of fluctuation in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, in the command correspondence table, the external command at the time of starting the change is not set in correspondence with the change command on a one-to-one basis, but the change is made in a one-to-one correspondence with the change command. The ON duration of the start signal is set. In other words, in the present embodiment, the contents of the interlocking effects can be specified by the external MPU 312 by making the ON continuation period of the variation start signal different.

  In step S2507, the ON continuation period corresponding to the variation command output this time to the sound light side MPU 82 is read from the command correspondence table. On the other hand, in step S2508, the ON continuation period set on the lower side by one address is read from the command correspondence table with respect to the ON continuation period corresponding to the variation command output to the sound light side MPU 82 this time. Here, in the command correspondence table, the common effect content of the change command set one address lower than one change command is different from the common effect content in the former change command. While being set, the common effect content is effect content that cannot be selected by the sound light side MPU 82 based on the former variation command. Therefore, in step S2508, the ON duration corresponding to the change command whose effect content does not match the change command transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 in the current game round is selected.

  After executing the processing of step S2507 or step S2508, the process proceeds to step S2509, and the fluctuation start signal is transmitted to the external device EX in the ON duration period selected in step S2507 or step S2508. Thereafter, the external output process is terminated.

  In the external MPU 312, a data table corresponding to the ON duration of the fluctuation start signal is read from the program ROM 313 to the work RAM 314, and an effect corresponding to the read data table is executed by the external display device 301. An internal command is output to the external VDP 315. As a result, when the effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the ON duration period selected in step S2507, a notice effect regarding the contents of the effect for game times executed by the symbol display device 41 is externally attached. It is executed by the display device 301. On the other hand, when the effect is executed in a mode corresponding to the ON duration period selected in step S2508, the contents of the effect for game times executed in the symbol display device 41 and the external display device 301 are used. As a result of the discrepancy between the linked game performances to be executed, the player is notified of the high probability mode.

  Next, the main-side command response processing executed by the sound light side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 62 or not. If these commands have been received, processing for determining a stop result command and pattern command is executed in step S2602, and in step S2603, the stop result command and pattern command determined in step S2602 are executed. Are stored in the sound-light side RAM 84, and the stop result command and the pattern command are transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S2604. The processing contents of these steps S2602 to S2604 are the same as those of steps S2207 to S2209 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 40) in the second embodiment.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or if the process of step S2604 is executed, it is determined in step S2605 whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If an opening command has been received, an opening handling process is executed in step S2606, and in step S2607, the opening command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 92.

  In a succeeding step S2608, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2608, a reproduction lottery process is executed in step S2609, and it is determined in step S2610 whether a reproduction win has been achieved. In the case of winning the reproduction, in step S2611, the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in the game round immediately before the current open / close execution mode are transmitted to the external apparatus EX by serial communication, A first opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication. Thereby, the external MPU 312 starts the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode on the external display device 301, and the effect performed on the symbol display device 41 in the immediately preceding game round after the opening effect ends. The external display device 301 is display-controlled so that the game display reproduction effect is performed on the external display device 301.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2608 or a negative determination is made in step S2610, the second opening command is transmitted to the external device EX by serial communication in step S2612. As a result, the external MPU 312 controls the display of the external display device 301 so that the normal bonus effect is performed.

  When the processing in step S2611 or step S2612 is executed, the other main processing is completed after executing other processing in step S2613. Note that the processing contents of steps S2605 to S2613 are the same as steps S2210 to S2218 of the main command handling process (FIG. 40) in the second embodiment.

  According to the third embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  The execution of the reproduction effect in the external device EX has the same effect as the second embodiment.

  The command for executing the reproduction effect in the external device EX is output from the sound light side MPU 82, whereas the effect corresponding to the effect is displayed in the external display device 301 when the effect for game play is started. The information to be performed at the outside is output from the main MPU 62 to the outside. Since the timing of occurrence of game times is arbitrary and the content of the effects for game times is also arbitrary, the content to be externally output cannot be prepared in advance. In this case, external output of information when starting an effect for game times is performed by the main-side MPU 62 existing on the upstream side of the control, so that an interlocked effect of game times on the external display device 301 can be performed at an early stage. It is possible to start. In addition, the function of outputting to the external device EX can be distributed according to the functions of the MPUs 62 and 82.

  When the sound light side MPU 82 externally outputs information corresponding to the effect for game play, it outputs it as a command using a plurality of terminals of the external terminal board 79, whereas the main MPU 62 uses it for game play. When information corresponding to the performance is output to the outside, only one terminal of the external terminal board 79 is used to output it as a signal. Thereby, it is possible to flexibly cope with diversification of types of information output to the outside.

  The main MPU 62 changes the type of information to be externally output to the external device EX by changing the ON duration of the fluctuation start signal. Thereby, even if it is a case where it outputs outside using one terminal, it becomes possible to output a plurality of kinds of information outside.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, unlike the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with the symbol display device 41. Instead, the external display device 301 of the external device EX fulfills the function of the symbol display device 41 in each of the above embodiments. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 45 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 and the external device EX in the present embodiment.

  As in the above embodiments, the external device EX is provided above the pachinko machine 10. In the above embodiments, the external device EX is provided in a fixed manner, whereas in the present embodiment, the external device EX is provided in a movable manner. The external device EX is provided with a pair of left and right movable arms 321 and 322, and the movement direction is restricted by the movable arms 321 and 322, so that the external device EX can move in the vertical direction. It has become. The external device EX is connected to the window panel 52 at an initial position above the pachinko machine 10 that does not overlap with the pachinko machine 10 and at a position adjacent to the window panel 52 of the pachinko machine 10. It can be displaced from the front to the opposite position in use.

  When the external device EX is disposed at the use position, the display surface of the external display device 301 is disposed at a position including the vertical center position and the horizontal center position of the window panel 52. In this case, there are non-opposing areas of the window panel 52 above, laterally, and below the external display device 301, respectively. These non-opposing areas are game areas PA where game balls flow down on the game board 24. On the other hand, it faces from the front. That is, the external display device 301 exists in the central area of the game area PA.

  The external display device 301 is formed using transparent liquid crystal so that the rear of the external display device 301 can be seen through. Therefore, even in a situation where the external display device 301 is disposed at the use position, the window panel 52 facing the rear and the gaming area PA facing the rear can be seen through.

  On the front surface of the external device EX, a plurality of external operation units 302 are provided beside the display surface of the external display device 301. All of these external operation units 302 are disposed outside the window panel 52 so as not to face the window panel 52 from the front in a situation where the external device EX is disposed at the use position. In addition, an external control board 311 is built in the side of the external device EX on the side where the external operation unit 302 is provided. The area where the external control board 311 is provided is a position where the external device EX is not opposed to the window panel 52 from the front in a situation where the external device EX is disposed at the time of use, and the window panel 52 side of the front door frame 14 This is a position facing the front area from the front.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 24 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  Unlike the above-described embodiments, the game board 24 is not provided with the symbol display device 41. Instead, a number of nails 24b are provided at the position where the symbol display device 41 is provided. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the flow-down mode of the game balls in the game area PA as compared to the above embodiments.

  A stage unit 325 is provided above the first operation port 33 in the game area PA. Above the stage unit 325, there is provided a ball entering portion 326 that allows a game ball to flow into the stage unit 325. The game ball that has entered the ball entering portion 326 is provided in the stage unit 325. Roll on the stage 327 in the horizontal direction. Then, the game ball discharged out of the stage unit 325 from the lateral center position of the stage 327 wins the first operation port 33 in comparison with the game ball discharged from the other position of the stage unit 325. It is easy.

  In a situation where the external device EX is disposed at the use position, the external display device 301 exists in the game area PA in the area where the nail 24b is provided and in front of the stage unit 325. As already described, since the external display device 301 is formed of transparent liquid crystal, even in a situation where the external device EX is disposed at the time of use, the game area PA and the stage unit located behind it 325 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, an electrical configuration for performing communication among the pachinko machine 10, the external device EX, and the hall computer HC will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the main MPU 62 can transmit various signals to the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 79. The type of signal transmitted to the hall computer HC is the same as that in the first embodiment. Further, the main MPU 62 can transmit commands to the external device EX through the external terminal board 79 by serial communication. The serial communication method is the same as that in the first embodiment.

  The main MPU 62 can transmit commands to the sound light MPU 82 by serial communication. This communication method of serial communication is the same as the communication method in the case of transmitting commands to the external apparatus EX by serial communication. Specifically, in order to transmit commands from the main MPU 62 to the sound light MPU 82. As the signal line group, a command data transmission signal line, a clock signal signal line, and a latch signal signal line are provided.

  Here, in this embodiment, the display control device 90 is not provided in correspondence with the symbol display device 41 not being provided in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 82 executes the control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 based on the command received from the main side MPU 62, but does not transmit the command toward the lower side. Further, in each of the above embodiments, the sound light side MPU 82 determines the production content for the execution time of the production corresponding to the command based on the command received from the main side MPU 62, but the data corresponding to the entire execution time. The table is read by the display-side MPU 92, and the execution control of the production in a part of the production range of the execution time is performed in the sound light-side MPU 82 based on a command transmitted from the display-side MPU 92 according to the data table. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, based on the command received from the main MPU 62, the content of the effect for the execution time of the effect corresponding to the command is determined, and the data table corresponding to the entire execution time is sounded. The light-side MPU 82 reads the data, and the sound light-side MPU 82 performs production execution control according to the read data table.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, the symbol display device 41 is not provided in the pachinko machine 10, and instead, the function of the symbol display device 41 is performed in the external display device 301 of the external device EX. Correspondingly, the program ROM 313 of the external device EX stores a program and fixed value data that allow the external display device 301 to perform an effect corresponding to the command transmitted from the main MPU 62. ing. In addition, in relation to the function of the symbol display device 41 in each of the above embodiments being performed in the external display device 301, the contents of the effect executed in the external display device 301 include the display light emitting unit 53 and It is necessary to relate to the contents of the effect executed by the speaker unit 54. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main side MPU 62 transmits the same command as the command transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 to the external side MPU 312.

  For example, when a variation command and a type command are transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the sound light side MPU 82 at the start of the game times, the same variation command and type command are transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the external side MPU 312. The When the opening command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound light MPU 82 at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, the same opening command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the external MPU 312. Note that the types of commands transmitted from the main MPU 62 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  When the external MPU 312 receives a command from the main MPU 62, the data table corresponding to the command is read from the program ROM 313 to the work RAM 314. Then, by generating and outputting an internal command to the external VDP 315 according to the contents of the data table, the external display device 301 causes a display effect according to the contents of the data table to be executed. This data table corresponds to the data table read from the same command in the sound light side MPU 82. For example, if it is a data table for game times, the data table read in the external MPU 312 and the sound light side MPU 82 In the data table read out at, the display duration of the game times is the same. When the data table for game times is read out, the symbols on the external display device 301 are displayed over the display continuation time determined by the main MPU 62. The content of the variable display of the symbol is the same as the display content of the symbol display device 41 in each of the above embodiments.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the production contents are uniquely determined by each of the sound light side MPU 82 and the external side MPU 312 based on the command transmitted from the main side MPU 62. In this case, if the degree of freedom in determining the content of the effect is high, the content of the effect executed by the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 and the content of the effect executed by the external display device 301 are inconsistent. May occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the details of the effect are determined in the main MPU 62. For example, if it is an effect for game times, the main lot MPU 62 executes the notice lottery process (step S1204) and the effect pattern determination process (step S1206) executed by the sound light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment. Then, a variation command based on the processing results is transmitted to each of the sound light side MPU 82 and the external side MPU 312.

  As described above, the external device EX is provided with the external operation unit 302 operated by the player to display various information. Correspondingly, the program ROM 313 stores a program and fixed value data for displaying various information on the external display device 301 in accordance with the operation of the external operation unit 302.

  Next, command output processing executed by the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the command output process includes the fraud detection process (step S205), the input state monitoring process (step S212), the special figure special electric control process (step S213), and the general-purpose power system shown in the first embodiment. This is executed when a command needs to be transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound light MPU 82 in the control process (step S214).

  First, in step S2701, it is determined whether it is a command output timing. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, the command output process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702. In step S2702, a command corresponding to the current output timing is read from the main ROM 63, and in step S2703, the read command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 82 by serial communication. In step S2704, the sound light is transmitted. The same command as that transmitted to the side MPU 82 is externally output to the external device EX by serial communication. Thereafter, the command output process is terminated.

  Next, an external control process executed by the external MPU 312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external control process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) in the external MPU 312.

  In the external control process, first, a main command storage process is executed in step S2801. The main command storage process is a process for storing a command in the work RAM 314 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The work RAM 314 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and stored. It is read sequentially according to the order.

  In the subsequent step S2802, main-side command response processing is executed. In the main command handling process, a data table corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is read from the program ROM 313 to the work RAM 314.

  In the subsequent step S2803, hall-side information corresponding to the signal received from the MPU 201 of the hall computer HC is stored in the work RAM 314. The signal received from the MPU 201 is a signal corresponding to a signal externally output from the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the external device EX to the hall computer HC. For example, information on the number of occurrences of the jackpot result, the number of occurrences of the opening / closing execution mode , Information on the number of game times executed, information on the number of game balls to be paid out, and the like are transmitted to the external device EX.

  In a succeeding step S2804, a display control process is executed. In the display control process, an internal command is output to the external VDP 315 every time the image is updated according to the data table read to the work RAM 314. The external VDP 315 outputs an image signal to the external display device 301 in accordance with the received internal command. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the data table is executed in the external display device 301. Note that the processing content of the display control processing is the same as the processing content of the task processing in step S1305 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 24) of the display side MPU 92 in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, in step S2805, it is determined whether or not the external operation unit 302 has been manually operated, and in step S2806, it is determined whether or not it is in the game times or opening / closing execution mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2805 or an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, the external control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2805 and a negative determination is made in step S2806, the control process corresponding to the operation is executed in step S2807, and then the external control process is terminated. In the control process corresponding to the operation, a process for displaying various information corresponding to the operation of the external operation unit 302 on the external display device 301 is executed.

  According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The pachinko machine 10 does not include the symbol display device 41. Instead, the external display device 301 performs the function of the symbol display device 41 in each of the above embodiments. Thereby, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, since the symbol display device 41 is not provided in the game area PA, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the game balls flow down in the game area PA. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the flow-down mode of the game balls.

  In a configuration in which the symbol display device 41 and the display control device 90 are not provided, the sound emission control device 80 is provided. Thereby, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by the sound light emission control device 80. In this case, the main side MPU 62 externally outputs the same command as the command transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 to the external side MPU 312. Thereby, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 can execute an effect corresponding to the display effect executed by the external display device 301. In addition, it is possible to share commands, and it is possible to reduce the types of commands.

  The external device EX is provided displaceably at a position facing the window 51 in front of the window 51 of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, it becomes possible to play a game with the visibility of the external display device 301 improved.

  In addition, since the external display device 301 is formed of transparent liquid crystal, even if the external display device 301 is arranged in front of the window portion 51, the flow of the game balls in the game area PA can be changed to the player. Visual recognition is possible.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing contents of the effect pattern determination process executed in step S1206 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 22) in the sound-side MPU 82 are different from those in the above-described embodiments. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a process for determining an effect pattern.

  First, in step S2901, a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a loop effect in the current game round is executed. In the case of performing an effect of displaying a special character as an effect for game times, the loop effect is to make the type of the special character different among a plurality of game times and When the types are different, it is an effect that is changed in a predetermined order and repeated changing laps in the predetermined order are repeated. More specifically, when the special character A, the special character B, and the special character C are set as the special characters, the special character A is selected in one game round that is the execution target of the loop effect. In this case, the special character B is selected in the next game play that is the execution target of the loop effect, the special character C is selected in the next game play that is the execution target of the loop effect, and is then the execution target of the loop effect. In the game round, the special character A is selected. Then, the change cycle in a predetermined order is repeated for selecting the type of the special character, such as special character A → special character B → special character C → special character A → special character B →.

  In the subsequent step S2902, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S2901 is a winning of the loop effect. If it is determined that the loop effect has been generated, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the value of the loop effect counter provided in the sound side RAM 84 is greater than 2. The loop effect counter is a counter for determining which special character is used when executing the loop effect. Specifically, when the value of the loop effect counter is “0”, the special character A is selected, and when the value of the loop effect counter is “1”, the special character B is selected, and the loop effect counter When the value of “2” is “2”, the special character C is selected.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, the value of the loop effect counter is cleared to “0” in step S2904. If a negative determination is made in step S2903, or if the process of step S2904 is executed, it is determined in step S2905 whether the state is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In step S2906, it is determined whether or not the current game number is a small hit result.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2905 or a negative determination is made in step S2906, a special character of the type corresponding to the current loop effect counter value is selected for the current loop effect in step S2907. Select as a character. Thereby, in this game round, a loop effect is performed using a special character of a type corresponding to the value of the loop effect counter.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in both step S2905 and step S2906, that is, if the game number is a small hit result in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, in step S2908 Then, a special character of a type corresponding to the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the current loop effect counter is selected as the character for the current loop effect. For example, when the value of the current loop effect counter is “1”, the special character C corresponding to the case where the value of the loop effect counter is “2” is selected, and the value of the current loop effect counter is “ In the case of “2”, the special character A corresponding to the case where the value of the loop effect counter is “0” is selected. As a result, a rule break occurs in the selection order of the special characters in the loop effect, and it is possible to notify the player that the mode is the high probability mode.

  When the process of step S2907 or step S2908 is executed, 1 is added to the value of the loop effect counter in step S2909. If a negative determination is made in step S2902, or if the process of step S2909 is executed, the other effect processes are executed in step S2910, and then the effect pattern determination process ends. In other processing, regarding the determination of the effect pattern, processing for determining contents other than the contents related to the loop effect is executed.

  According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, when a small hit result is obtained in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the law of the selection order of special characters in the loop effect is broken. It becomes. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the player that the mode is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode by using the occurrence of the law breaking. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the loop effect.

  In addition, the above notification is performed when the small hit result is triggered, so that the advantage of the small hit result can be increased, and the player's expectation for the small hit result can be increased. It becomes possible.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing contents of the effect pattern determination process executed in step S1206 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 22) in the sound-side MPU 82 are different from those in the above-described embodiments. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the effect pattern determination process.

  First, in step S3001, a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a previous notice effect in the current game round is executed. The previous notice effect is a situation in which symbols are variably displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or a symbol is displayed in standby in one symbol row Z1, and symbols are variably displayed in the remaining symbol rows Z1 and Z2. In the situation, it is an effect of displaying a notice character in order to notify the degree of expectation that the reach effect occurs in the game times and the degree of expectation that the hit result will occur. A plurality of types of the notice characters are set so as to include at least one-to-one character corresponding to the type of reach effect, and when a notice character corresponding to the type of reach effect is displayed, In the game times, a reach effect corresponding to the notice character is generated.

  In the following step S3002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S3001 is a winning of the previous notice effect. If the previous notice effect has been won, the process advances to step S3003. In step S3003, the type of reach effect to be executed in the current game round is grasped from the contents of the variation command received this time. In the subsequent step S3004, the type of the notice character corresponding to the type of reach effect grasped in step S3003 is grasped.

  Thereafter, in step S3005, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are in effect, and in step S3006, it is determined whether or not the current game round is a small hit result. To do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3005, or if a negative determination is made in step S3006, in step S3007, a pre-notification effect in which the type of notification character grasped in step S3004 is displayed is set. As a result, in the current game round, after a pre-announcement effect is displayed before a predetermined notice character is displayed, a reach effect corresponding to the predetermined notice character, for example, a reach effect in which the predetermined notice character appears, is executed. The

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in both step S3005 and step S3006, that is, if the game number is a small hit result in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, in step S3008 Then, a pre-notification effect is set in which a different kind of notice character from the kind of notice character recognized in step S3004 is displayed. As a result, in the current game round, after the pre-notice effect is displayed before the predetermined notice character is displayed, the reach effect that does not correspond to the predetermined notice character, for example, the reach effect that the predetermined notice character does not appear is executed. Is done. In this case, a law break occurs between the previous notice effect and the reach effect, and it is possible to notify the player that the high probability mode is set.

  When the process of step S3007 or step S3008 is executed, after the other processes are executed in step S3009, the effect pattern determination process is terminated. In other processing, regarding the determination of the effect pattern, processing for determining contents other than the contents related to the loop effect is executed.

  According to the sixth embodiment described in detail above, when a small hit result is obtained in the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the law of the correspondence relationship between the notice character and the reach effect character Will collapse. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the player that the mode is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode by using the occurrence of the law breaking. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the effect using the notice character.

  In addition, the above notification is performed when the small hit result is triggered, so that the advantage of the small hit result can be increased, and the player's expectation for the small hit result can be increased. It becomes possible.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) Information may be externally output from the pachinko machine 10 toward the external device EX so that an effect corresponding to the effect of the opening / closing execution mode in the pachinko machine 10 is executed. In this case, for example, as an effect of the opening / closing execution mode, a stop result in a mode in which it is not possible to specify which of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode corresponds to the jackpot result in the symbol display device 41 as an effect for game play. When a promotion effect is displayed that may be displayed to clearly indicate that it is compatible with the transition to the high probability mode during the open / close execution mode, an effect corresponding to the promotion effect is externally displayed. It is good also as a structure performed with the apparatus 301. FIG. In this case, the external display device 301 may be configured to display the content indicating the degree of expectation that is displayed in the promotion effect that clearly indicates that the transition to the high probability mode is supported.

  (2) With regard to an interlocking effect of game times executed by the external display device 301 based on an external command or a change start signal output from the pachinko machine 10 at the start of change, a lottery for whether or not to execute the game is displayed on the pachinko machine 10 side. It is good also as a structure by which the lottery of the said execution presence or absence is performed on the external device EX side instead of the structure performed by this. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the lottery of the said execution presence is performed in both the pachinko machine 10 side and the external device EX.

  In addition, the above-described game play linked effect is executed with a predetermined probability when a predetermined reach effect is executed in the game turn effect on the symbol display device 41 or when the predetermined reach effect is executed. It is good.

  (3) The external command at the start of variation may be a command including a part of data included in the variation command. For example, in the same way as in the first embodiment, the change command is set to the identification data for indicating that the change command is the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data. The next 4-bit data sets the lottery result data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, and the remaining 8-bit data sets the time data corresponding to the display duration time. In the configuration, the time data is extracted from the change command, and data indicating that it is an external command at the start of change may be used as the external command at the start of change. In this case, in the external device EX, it is possible to specify the content of the common effect from the time data indicating the display continuation time, so that the external display device 301 can produce an effect for game times based on the external command at the start of the change. It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the above.

  (4) The external command at the start of fluctuation may include data indicating the result of the determination, or in addition to or instead of the data indicating the result of the distribution determination. Good. Further, the variation command may be used as it is as an external command at the start of variation. In this case, the change command can be used as it is, so that the data capacity can be reduced.

  (5) It is good also as a structure by which the data which show the content of production common in the production for game times which can be derived | led-out from the command for variation are set to the command for variation. In this case, it is possible to extract the data of the common effect contents from the variation command and add the data indicating the external command at the start of variation to the external command at the start of variation. This makes it possible to use the change command when deriving an external command at the start of change.

  (6) As an external command at the start of fluctuation, a command indicating that a reach effect with a high expectation resulting in a jackpot result is executed is output externally, but a premium effect that determines that a jackpot result is determined is executed A command indicating this may not be output externally. As a result, it is possible to prevent a command indicating that a jackpot result is output externally as an external command at the start of fluctuation.

  (7) In the interlocking effect of the external display device 301, the character that is the same as or corresponds to the character displayed in the reach effect of the effect for game times in the symbol display device 41 is displayed before the start of the reach effect. However, instead of this, the character may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the reach effect or after the start of the reach effect. In this case, the interlocking effect does not function as a prior notification effect of the content of the reach effect in the symbol display device 41, but functions as an emphasis effect of the content of the reach effect in the symbol display device 41.

  (8) A command for causing the external display device 301 to execute the linked effect may be output from the display-side MPU 92 to the outside. For example, the stop result command and the pattern command received from the sound side MPU 82 may be externally output from the display side MPU 92, and only one of the stop result command and the pattern command, more specifically, only the pattern command is displayed. The configuration may be such that the output from the side MPU 92 is external. Further, a command corresponding to the stop result command and the pattern command and corresponding to a part of the effect range of the effect for game play may be output from the display side MPU 92 to the outside.

  (9) The stop result command and the pattern command may be externally output from the sound light side MPU 82 so that the external display device 301 can execute the linked effect, and either the stop result command or the pattern command, More specifically, only the pattern command may be externally output from the sound light side MPU 82.

  (10) In the first embodiment, at least one of the notice lottery process and the stop symbol determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 82 may be executed by the main MPU 62. For example, when the stop symbol determination process is executed by the main MPU 62, the information for the stop symbol is included in the change command. Then, when the change command is externally output to the external device EX, the external display side MPU 312 of the external device EX can grasp the stop symbol of the symbol display device 41. In the case where the game 301 reproduction effect is executed by the device 301, the type of the final stop symbol or the reach symbol can be made to correspond to the effect for the game time.

  Further, not only the stop symbol determination process but also the notice lottery process is executed by the main MPU 62, so that the information for the entire game play effect is included in the variation command. Then, when the change command is externally output to the external device EX, the external MPU 312 can grasp the entire amount of the effect for game play, so that the external display device 301 can play the game. When executing the reproduction effect of times, it is possible to reproduce the entire effect for the game times.

  (11) A variation command may be externally output from the sound light side MPU 82 in order to cause the external display device 301 to perform a game time reproduction effect. In addition, a stop result command and a pattern command may be externally output from the display-side MPU 92 so that the external display device 301 can execute a game time reproduction effect. Further, in order to execute the reproduction effect of the game times on the external display device 301, either the stop result command or the pattern command, more specifically, only the pattern command is externally output from the sound light side MPU 82 or the display side MPU 92. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  (12) When there is an open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is different as the open / close execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, reproduction in the external display device 301 is performed in the open / close execution mode in which the number of round games is a predetermined number or more. It is good also as a structure where an effect can be performed. For example, when there are an opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of round games is 16 times and an opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of round games is eight, the latter opening / closing execution mode has a reproduction effect. On the other hand, it may be configured such that a reproduction effect can be executed in the former opening / closing execution mode.

  (13) An effect for game times whose display duration time is a predetermined time or less may be an execution target of a reproduction effect in the external display device 301. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, the high-frequency side reference time corresponding to the mode is set, and the display for the game duration of the display duration that is less than the high-frequency side reference time is reproduced. Make it the execution target of the production. In addition, if the low-frequency winning mode open / close execution mode is set, the low-frequency side reference time corresponding to the mode is set, and the display for the game duration of the display duration that is less than the low-frequency side reference time is reproduced. Make it the execution target of the production. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the reproduction effect is executed.

  (14) The reproduction effect in the external display device 301 may be configured to execute only a part of the effect range in the effect for game times. For example, it may be configured such that the production range after the symbol is displayed on standby in the first symbol sequence for switching to standby display is executed, or the production range after the start of reach production may be executed. It is good also as a structure by which the production range after the start of a super reach production is performed.

  (15) The reproduction effect in the external display device 301 may be configured such that only the character displayed in the reach effect in the effect for game times is displayed, and the variable display of the symbol and the reach effect itself are not reproduced. In this case, the external command at the start of change, which is externally output to execute the linked effect on the external display device 301, may be externally output to execute the reproduction effect on the external display device 301. Good.

  (16) The output timing of the command output from the pachinko machine 10 to execute the reproduction effect on the external display device 301 is not limited at the start of the opening / closing execution mode. It may be the case where the measurement of the final stop time is started, the case where the final stop time has elapsed, or during the opening production in the opening / closing execution mode, and the timing when the first opening of the special electric prize device 32 is started It may be after that.

  (17) When the display effect of the reproduction effect is executed by the external display device 301, the sound output may be reproduced accordingly. In this case, a sound output for reproduction effect may be performed by the external device EX, or may be performed by the speaker unit 54 of the pachinko machine 10.

  (18) The effect of breaking the law that does not match the contents of the effect for game times on the symbol display device 41 and the contents of the interlocking effect on the external display device 301 is not the game times that resulted in the small hit result, but a predetermined reach. It is good also as a structure which generate | occur | produces in the game time which produces | generates a production | generation and results in a losing result. In this case, it is possible to provide an effect of breaking the law as compensation for the loss of the reach effect. Moreover, the effect is heightened by making it generate | occur | produce when the reach | attainment effect more than a predetermined | prescribed expectation remove | deviates from the said structure.

  (19) The effect of breaking the law in which the contents of the effect for game times in the symbol display device 41 and the contents of the interlocking effect in the external display device 301 do not match is the number of times the game times are continued in a situation where no jackpot result occurs. It may be configured to occur when the reference number of times is exceeded. In this case, it is possible to provide an effect of breaking the law as compensation for the fact that the jackpot result does not occur continuously.

  (20) Although the contents of the effects for the game times in the symbol display device 41 and the contents of the interlocking effects in the external display device 301 are not usually the same, the high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are notified. It is good also as a structure in which both production | generation contents correspond as rule breaking in a case.

  (21) The contents of the interlocking effects executed by the external display device 301 for the effect of breaking the law in which the contents of the effects for the game times in the symbol display device 41 and the contents of the interlocking effects in the external display device 301 do not match. It is good also as a structure performed by adjusting the content of the effect for game times performed by the symbol display apparatus 41 instead of adjusting by adjusting.

  (22) In a situation where an effect for game times is being executed in the symbol display device 41, the same effect as the effect for game times may be executed in the external display device 301. For example, when the exact match effect is performed, a configuration in which the occurrence of a reach effect that exceeds a predetermined expectation may be confirmed, or a configuration in which the occurrence of a jackpot result is confirmed, which is a high probability mode. The occurrence of the jackpot result for the high frequency support mode may be determined. In addition, as described above, an effect corresponding to the entire effect for game times is performed as an interlocked effect of the external display device 301, and a part of the effect range in the effect for game times is reproduced as an effect of reproduction of the external display device 301. It is good also as a structure by which the production | generation corresponding to is performed.

  (23) In the fourth embodiment, instead of a configuration in which various commands are externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external MPU 312, various commands are externally output from the sound light MPU 82 to the external MPU 312. It is good. In this case, a command based on the contents of the notice lottery process and the stop symbol determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 82 is externally output to the external MPU 312, and the sound light side MPU 82 corresponds to the externally output command. In this manner, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are controlled. Therefore, the display light emitting unit 53 can execute a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect for game times on the external display device 301, and the speaker unit 54 can generate a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect. It is possible to execute.

  (24) In the fourth embodiment, when the external device EX is used by retracting the upper region of the middle position in the vertical direction of the window panel 52 of the front door frame 14 to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the lower region. When it arrange | positions to a position, it is good also as a structure which can make the position of the external apparatus EX into the back | inner side, preventing the window panel 52 from interfering with the external apparatus EX.

  (25) In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may not include the speaker unit 54, and the sound output function may be performed by the external device EX. In this case, since the display effect and the sound output effect are executed in the external device EX, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 can be further simplified.

  (26) The end reference number of times of the high probability mode is not limited to that in the above embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the high-probability mode end reference count for an explicit high-probability hit result may be different from the high-probability mode end reference count for a non-explicit high-probability hit result. The case where the jackpot result is obtained may be configured to have a larger number of end reference times than the case where the result is an implicit high probability jackpot result, and may be configured to be small.

  Also, multiple types of explicit high-probability hit results may be set so that the high-probability mode end reference count is different, and multiple types of explicit high-probability hit results are set so that the high-probability mode end reference count is different. It may be set. In addition, at least one of the explicit high-probability jackpot result and the non-explicit high-probability jackpot result may have a configuration in which the number of completion criterion times of the high probability mode is smaller than that of at least one advantageous jackpot result, and a higher probability than any advantageous jackpot result. A configuration may be adopted in which the mode end reference count is large.

  In addition, as an implicit high probability hit result, if it occurs in the situation of the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, another implicit high probability big hit result that becomes the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is obtained. It may be set. In this case, the other non-explicit high probability hit result may be configured to have a higher probability mode end reference count or less than the non-explicit high probability hit result of each of the above embodiments.

  (27) As a result of at least a part of the jackpot result, there is a jackpot result in which the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode end criterion count differ from the high-probability mode end-reference count. It is good also as the composition set up. In this case, there may be a jackpot result in which the end criterion count in the high probability mode is larger than the end criterion count in the high frequency support mode, and the end criterion count in the high probability mode ends in the high frequency support mode. There may be jackpot results less than the reference number. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further diversify the game mode transition mode and improve the interest of the game.

  (28) The result of the lottery process performed on the pachinko machine 10 side is not executed by the external device EX, but the effect lottery process for notifying the degree of expectation of the end number of times of completion in the high probability mode The external display device 301 may produce an effect for notifying the degree of expectation by outputting a command corresponding to the above to the external device EX. In this case, the lottery process for the contents of the effects is executed individually for the effect for informing the expectation degree on the pachinko machine 10 side and the effect for informing the expectation degree on the external device EX side. As a result, a plurality of types of information for predicting the end reference number of times in the high probability mode are provided to the player, and the player can perform advanced prediction on the end reference number.

  (29) Regarding the notification of the end reference number of times in the high probability mode, as long as the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are in use, the pachinko machine 10 may clearly indicate the end reference number. For example, the end reference number of times may be clearly indicated in the symbol display device 41, and the end reference number of times may be subtracted and displayed each time the game time is consumed. Further, in this configuration, the end reference number of times may be specified also in the external display device 301. On the other hand, in the external display device 301, the end reference number is not specified, a plurality of types of numerical ranges are set, a notification mode corresponding to the numerical range is set, and a numerical range including the end reference number is included. It is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting by the alerting | reporting aspect corresponding to is performed in the external display apparatus 301. FIG.

  (30) A communication system conversion circuit is provided between the pachinko machine 10 and the external MPU 312, and a command externally output from the pachinko machine 10 is converted into a communication system that can be received by the external MPU 312 by the conversion circuit. It is good also as a structure. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 outputs a command externally through serial communication, the conversion circuit may convert the command into a parallel system. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 outputs a command externally by parallel communication, the conversion circuit may convert the command into a serial system.

  (31) When the opening / closing execution mode occurs, information corresponding to the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode may be externally output to the external device EX. In this case, a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes having different numbers of round games are set, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the opening / closing execution mode of the round game cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. You may make it perform the production | presentation for alert | reporting the expectation degree that it is the frequency | count that there are many round games in EX. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the effect for alert | reporting the said expectation degree is performed in both the pachinko machine 10 and the external device EX.

  (32) Instead of a configuration that shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode when the number of game times consumed reaches the end reference number, the transition may not occur depending on the number of game times consumed. That is, when the high probability mode is set, the high probability mode may be continued until at least the next jackpot result is generated.

  (33) It is good also as a structure by which multiple types of completion | finish reference | standard frequency | counts of the high frequency support mode at the time of becoming low frequency mode and becoming high frequency support mode are set. In this case, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that it cannot be identified or difficult to identify the end reference number, and the external device EX is expected to have a large number of end reference numbers in the high-frequency support mode. An effect for informing the degree may be executed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the effect for alert | reporting the said expectation degree is performed in both the pachinko machine 10 and the external device EX.

  (34) When performing an effect for game times, the variation command and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound light side MPU 82, but the type command may not be transmitted. In addition to the variation command, an additional command indicating information such as whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous may be transmitted. In this case, the display duration as a base in the change command is determined, and an additional display duration with respect to the display duration of the base is determined by the additional command. Thereby, whether or not to perform an additional effect such as a pseudo-ream and the type in which the additional effect is performed is determined by lottery in the main side MPU 62, and the determination result is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. Even if it is, since the data about the effect transmitted from the main MPU 62 is distributed to the change command and the additional command, the data capacity of each command can be suppressed.

  In the above configuration, when a command is externally output from the main MPU 62 in order to execute an interlocking effect or a reproduction effect of game times on the external device EX, the command for change and the additional command are output as the externally output commands. Of these, only the additional command may be externally output, the command corresponding to the additional command may be externally output, or only the variable command may be externally output. A command corresponding to the command may be output externally, both commands may be output externally, or a command corresponding to both commands may be output externally.

  (35) The types of effects executed by the symbol display device 41 are accumulated on the pachinko machine 10 side, and a command corresponding to the accumulation result is externally output to the external device EX, thereby corresponding to the accumulation result. It is good also as a structure which performs an effect in the external display apparatus 301. FIG.

  (36) When abnormality notification or state notification is performed in the pachinko machine 10, a command corresponding to the notification may be output to the external device EX. In this case, the external display device 301 can also perform abnormality notification and state notification.

  (37) In the first embodiment, a command may be externally output from the main MPU 62 to the external device EX through parallel communication. In the second embodiment, a command may be transmitted from the sound light side MPU 82 to the display side MPU 92 by parallel communication. In this case, the command may be externally output from the sound light side MPU 82 to the external device EX by parallel communication, or the command may be externally output by serial communication.

  (38) The number of opening and closing of the special prize winning device 32 and the setting pattern of the opening mode in the opening / closing execution mode of each pattern are not limited to those in each of the above embodiments, and the actions described individually in each of the above embodiments. It is optional as long as at least one of the effects can be achieved.

  Further, the upper limit number of each round game is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and may be any as long as at least one of the functions and effects described individually in each of the above embodiments can be achieved. It is. Further, the upper limit number may be different depending on the type of round number defining mode, or the upper limit number may be different between round games in the same round number defining mode.

  Further, the release mode by the short-time mode is not limited to that in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a time longer than the launch cycle of the game ball, and the launch cycle of the game ball × n (n = 1, 2, 3) The following time may be set. In addition, although the winning duration can be made longer than the launching period of the game balls, a winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 can be generated, but the opening duration is the launching period of the game balls and the upper limit number during the round game. It is good also as an aspect shorter than the product of, and good also as an aspect which is the same. Even in this case, when the special prize winning device 32 is opened in a short time mode, the possibility that the upper limit number of round games will be awarded to the special prize winning device 32 is reduced.

  (39) In a round game in which only the opening of the special electric prize device 32 in a short time mode is performed, instead of a configuration in which the winning of the upper limit number of game balls set for the round game does not substantially occur, the upper limit It is good also as a structure which can generate | occur | produce the winning of a number of game balls. For example, the opening duration of the special electricity winning device 32 is set to a time longer than the game ball firing cycle (for example, a range of 0.6 sec to 64 seconds), and the opening and closing of the special electricity winning device 32 according to the opening duration and the opening mode. The product of the number of times is the same as or approximately the same as the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of round games, or 1 to 2 times or less than 1 to 3 times the product It is set as the structure which is the value of. In this case, depending on the manner in which the game balls flow down in the game area, the upper limit number of game balls may or may not be won.

  (40) As the short-time mode, a plurality of types of short-time modes may be set so that the appearance operation mode of the special electric prize device 32 is the same although the exact opening duration time is different. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the non-explicit jackpot result and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result, the operation mode of the special electric prize device 32 is the same, but is selected at each opening / closing of the special electric prize device 32. It is good also as a structure from which the kind of short time aspect which differs is different.

  (41) While the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the value of the high probability counter may be set to “0” regardless of the contents of the high probability counter before the opening / closing execution mode transition. In this case, during the opening / closing execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. In addition, the timing for clearing the high probability counter to “0” may be a timing at which the stop display according to the mode corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is started in the special figure display unit 37a. It may be a start timing, a timing in the middle of the opening time of the opening / closing execution mode, or an end timing of the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode. However, in this configuration, when executing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, it is not possible to determine the success / failure lottery mode before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode from the contents of the high probability counter. Therefore, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, it is preferable to execute a data storage process that makes it possible to specify the success / failure lottery mode before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  (42) During the period in which the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the value of the high-frequency counter may be “0” regardless of the content of the high-frequency counter before the opening / closing execution mode transition. Even in this case, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode during the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the timing at which the high-frequency counter is cleared to “0” may be the timing at which stop display according to the mode corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is started in the special figure display unit 37a. It may be a start timing, a timing in the middle of the opening time of the opening / closing execution mode, or an end timing of the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode. However, in this configuration, when the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the support mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode cannot be determined from the contents of the high-frequency counter. Therefore, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, it is preferable to execute a data storage process that makes it possible to specify the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode.

  (43) While the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, the special electric prize winning device 32 is completely closed. However, a part of the special electric prize winning device 32 may not be closed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball can win the special electric prize device 32 even if it is closed through the partial area, and the partial ball is closed because the partial area is narrower than the game ball. However, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a game ball cannot be awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32.

  (44) Instead of a configuration in which the winning of the game ball to the second operating port 34 is impossible during the closing of the utility wire 34a, the second operating port 34 is entered even when the utility wire 34a is closed. It is good also as a structure which can generate | occur | produce the winning of this game ball. However, the easiness of winning the prize needs to be lower than that during the opening of the main utility 34a.

  (45) Not only the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, but also a medium-probability mode that has a low probability of winning a big hit than the high-probability mode and a high probability of winning a big-win as compared with the low-probability mode, It is good also as composition which has. As the medium probability mode, for example, a jackpot winning probability in the high probability mode (for example, 1 / n n is an integer of 1 or more) and a winning probability in the low probability mode (for example, 1 / m m is 1 or more). An intermediate probability with an integer m> n) (for example, 1 / (n + (mn) / 2)), a higher probability than the intermediate probability, or a lower probability than the intermediate probability. Also good.

  (46) As a support mode, not only the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode but also the prize winning frequency to the second operation port 34 is lower than the high frequency support mode and the second operation port 34 is connected to the second operation port 34 than the low frequency support mode. A configuration in which a medium frequency support mode having a high winning frequency may exist may be employed.

  (47) The operation means capable of notifying that the mode is the high probability mode is not limited to the symbol display device 41 in which the symbol variation display is performed in each game round, and is dedicated for performing the notification. The display device may be a movable decorative member, or a light emitting unit such as an LED.

  (48) As an opening mode of the special electricity prize winning device 32, there may be a configuration in which there is a medium time mode in which the opening duration time is shorter than the long time mode and longer than the short time mode.

  (49) The hold information acquired as a result of winning a prize at the first operating port 33 and the hold information acquired as a result of winning a prize at the second operating port 34 are stored separately. A configuration in which the hold information on the second operation port 34 side is digested preferentially may be applied, and conversely, a configuration in which the hold information on the first operation port 33 side is preferentially digested may be applied. It is also possible to apply a configuration that is digested in the acquisition order regardless of whether the first working port 33 or the second working port 34.

  In the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged in parallel vertically, but the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 may be arranged in the left and right directions. It is good also as a structure by which the opening | mouth was diagonally arranged in parallel. Furthermore, according to the operation mode of the firing operation device 28, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged apart from each other so that only the winning of the first operating port 33 or only the winning of the second operating port 34 can be aimed. It is good also as a structure.

  In the above configuration, the special display unit 37a displays a first display area for displaying the determination result of the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first operating port 33, and the winning to the second operating port 34. And a second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the information. In this case, the variation of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first working port 33 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. The display is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the display of variation in the pattern in the second display area is based on whether or not the hold information acquired based on winning in the second working port 34 is the target of the success / failure determination or based on the target of the determination. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended.

  (50) On-hold information acquired when the hold information acquired by the winning of the first operating port 33 is a target of the determination of the success / failure and the win information generated by the winning of the second operating port 34 It is good also as a structure from which the profit which a player obtains differs by the case where it becomes the object of a decision | availability determination. For example, when the hold information on the first operation port 33 side is the target of the determination of the success / failure, the game result is distributed as in the above embodiment, but the hold information on the second operation port 34 side is the determination of the success / failure determination. In the event that the target is a big win, it may be divided into an advantageous jackpot result, an explicit high probability big hit result, or a low probability big hit result.

  Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in the above embodiment, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (51) Display control based on a command transmitted from the main controller 60 instead of a configuration in which the display controller 90 is controlled by the sound emission controller 80 based on a command transmitted from the main controller 60 The device 90 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 80. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 60, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 80 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 80 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

  (52) The device for executing the effect for the game times is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the effect for the game times is executed by operating the decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (53) In the above embodiment, the special figure display unit 37a displays a stop result corresponding to each game result, but instead of this, the special figure display unit 37a may be omitted. Even if it is a game result, it is good also as a structure by which a common stop result is displayed in the special figure display part 37a, and the special figure display part 37a is eventually displayed by displaying a stop result in the special figure display part 37a at random. It is good also as a structure which cannot identify which game result is from the display. In each of the embodiments described above, the special display unit 37a repeats the display of a predetermined pattern regardless of the result of the determination as to whether or not it has been assigned and does not execute reach display and reach production, and finally stops. Although the configuration is such that the results of the success / failure determination and the allocation determination are notified based on the result, the special display display unit 37a may also be configured to perform reach display and reach production. It is good also as a structure by which the stop result different from the game time which does not generate | occur | produce is displayed on the special figure display part 37a.

  (54) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific area of the special device, or a game ball in the specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
Effect processing execution means for executing an effect process for executing an effect corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery process (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 82 and the display side) MPU92),
External output means for outputting information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing to the outside of the gaming machine (in the first embodiment, external output processing at the start of variation and external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the main MPU 62 In the second embodiment, a function of executing steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound-side MPU 82, a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, and A function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, since information corresponding to the result of the effect processing is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery process beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  Feature A2. The external output means is a predetermined output means for outputting predetermined information (external command at the start of change) that is information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing and does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery processing ( In the first embodiment, a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62, in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, sound light. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the side MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A2, in the configuration in which an effect corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery process can be executed outside the gaming machine, the predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the bonus lottery process. It is possible to suppress the act of trying to misuse the result of illegally reading. In addition, it is possible to prevent the result corresponding to the privilege lottery process from being taught outside the gaming machine before being taught by the gaming machine.

Feature A3. There are multiple types of benefits granted by the privilege granting means,
The predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information so as not to include not only information specifying the result of the privilege lottery process but also information specifying the type of the privilege. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A3, since the predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates the type of privilege, it is possible to suppress an act of misusing the result of illegally reading the predetermined information. In addition, it is possible to prevent information specifying the type of privilege from being taught outside the gaming machine before being taught by the gaming machine.

Feature A4. Production execution means (display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of performing the production are provided,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (game play effect) is executed as the effect process. A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The external output means does not include information specifying the result of the privilege lottery process at a timing before the content of the effect of the predetermined effect becomes the content of the effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. Predetermined output means for outputting predetermined information (external command at the start of change) including information corresponding to the contents of (in the first embodiment, a function of executing external output processing at the start of change in the main MPU 62, the second In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the fourth embodiment of step S2704 in the main side MPU 62 The gaming machine according to Feature A1, further comprising a function for executing processing.

  According to the feature A4, since the predetermined information is output at a timing before the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, it corresponds to the predetermined effect during execution of the predetermined effect. It is possible to execute an effect to be performed by an external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. In addition, since the predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process, it is possible to suppress an act of misusing the result of illegally reading the predetermined information. In addition, it is possible to prevent the result corresponding to the privilege lottery process from being taught outside the gaming machine before being taught by the gaming machine.

  Feature A5. The predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect as the predetermined information, and is executed as the predetermined effect in any of the cases where the privilege grant is won in the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to Feature A4, which outputs information corresponding to the content of the effect to be obtained.

  According to the feature A5, it is impossible to execute the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect using the predetermined information outside the gaming machine, and to grasp the result of the privilege lottery process from the predetermined information. Become.

Feature A6. The predetermined effect control means causes the effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect for a predetermined duration.
The predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information so as not to include not only information specifying the result of the privilege lottery process but also information specifying the predetermined duration. Or the game machine as described in A5.

  According to the feature A6, the type of the predetermined information can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the information indicating the predetermined duration is included in the predetermined information, and the configuration for outputting the predetermined information can be simplified. Is possible.

  Feature A7. The predetermined output means is not information that can specify the entire contents of the predetermined effect, but outputs information corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect as the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A6, wherein:

  According to the feature A7, since the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a part of the effect range in the effect range included in the predetermined effect, the effect corresponding to the part of the effect range is external to the gaming machine. It can be executed by the external production means. In addition, the configuration for outputting the predetermined information can be simplified.

  Feature A8. The gaming machine according to Feature A7, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information common to a plurality of types of the predetermined effects.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to suppress the types of the predetermined information, and it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting the predetermined information.

Feature A9. The predetermined effect control means can select a plurality of types of effect contents for the predetermined effect determining element derived from the result of the privilege lottery process as the content of the predetermined effect, and is derived from the predetermined effect determining element. The predetermined content is selected so that the common content is included in the predetermined performance,
The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8, wherein the predetermined information output by the predetermined output means includes information that clearly indicates the common effect contents.

  According to the feature A9, since the predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates the content of the common effect, even if the entire content of the predetermined effect is not determined, the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to output predetermined information to the outside. As a result, the degree of freedom regarding the output timing of the predetermined information is improved, and the design of the configuration for outputting the predetermined information can be facilitated.

Feature A10. Comprising specific control means (main MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect process execution means determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means (main MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect process. Effect content determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82; in the second embodiment, executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82) Function, in the third embodiment, the function of executing step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82)
The gaming machine according to Feature A8 or A9, wherein the predetermined effect determining element corresponds to the content of the control information.

  According to the feature A10, the effect can be executed by the effect executing means so as to correspond to the content of the control information received from the specific control means, and the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. It is possible to execute the production at.

  Feature A11. The gaming machine according to Feature A10, wherein the specific control means includes the predetermined output means.

  According to the feature A11, since the specific control means existing upstream of the control has a function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to consolidate the functions for managing the operation of the gaming machine into the specific control means. It becomes.

Feature A12. The effect content determination means is effect lottery means for executing effect content lottery processing for determining the effect content of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (on the sound side in the first and fourth embodiments) The function of executing the processes of step S1204 and step S1206 in the MPU 82, the function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Function to be executed)
The effect lottery means executes the effect content lottery process in a manner corresponding to the type of the control information, and the predetermined effect that can be selected for one piece of the control information has a common effect content. The effect content lottery process is executed so as to be included,
The predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates the common effect content,
The specific control means stores correspondence information storage means (in the first and third embodiments, the main ROM 63 and the first ROM 63) that store specific correspondence information that can specify the correspondence between the type of the control information and the type of the predetermined information. In the second embodiment, the game machine according to Feature A11, which includes a sound light side ROM 83).

  According to the feature A12, a plurality of types of effect contents can be selected for one piece of control information transmitted from the specific control means. Can be realized. In this case, in the effect content lottery process executed by the predetermined effect control means, common effect contents are included in the predetermined effect that can be selected for one piece of control information. Thereby, in the configuration in which the content of the production of the predetermined production is diversified while suppressing the increase in the type of control information as described above, the specific control means outputs the predetermined information corresponding to the common production content to the outside, An effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be performed in an external effect means outside the gaming machine. Also, since the specific control means stores specific correspondence information that can identify the correspondence between the type of control information and the type of predetermined information, the specific information can be easily specified from the control information transmitted by itself. Is possible. Therefore, the process for outputting the predetermined information can be simplified.

Feature A13. Production execution means (display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of performing the production are provided,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (game play effect) is executed as the effect process. A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The external output means is a specific output means (in the first embodiment, the main side in the first embodiment) that outputs specific information (variation command) corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect after the predetermined effect is started in the effect executing means. A function of executing external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the MPU 62, a function of executing the process of step S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of

  According to the feature A13, even if the player misses the predetermined effect in the effect execution means, it is possible to provide the player again with an opportunity to confirm the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect. In addition, when the effects are executed at different times so that the gaming machine side is the front side and the outside of the gaming machine is the rear side, the contents of the effects can be related.

  Feature A14. The gaming machine according to Feature A13, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information after the predetermined effect is ended by the effect executing means.

  According to the feature A14, it is possible to prevent the effect outside the gaming machine based on the external output of the specific information and the predetermined effect in the effect executing means from overlapping in time. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to each production.

  Feature A15. The gaming machine according to Feature A14, wherein the identification information includes information that enables identification of the entire contents of at least a part of the production range among the production contents of the predetermined production.

  According to the feature A15, it is possible to reproduce at least a part of the entire production range of the production content of the predetermined production in the external production means provided outside the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide the player who missed the part of the effect range again with an opportunity to check the part of the effect range.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A14 or A15, wherein the identification information includes information that enables identification of the entire content of the effect of the predetermined performance.

  According to the feature A16, it is possible to reproduce the entire content of the effect of the predetermined effect in the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide again an opportunity for the player who missed the predetermined effect to confirm the predetermined effect.

Feature A17. Comprising specific control means (main MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect process execution means determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means (main MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect process. Effect content determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82; in the second embodiment, executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82) Function, in the third embodiment, the function of executing step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82)
The specific output means is used as the specific information to determine the content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information that is a trigger for determining the content of the specific effect corresponding to the output of the specific information. The game machine according to any one of features A13 to A16, wherein the game machine outputs information including information to be processed.

  According to the feature A17, in the configuration in which an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be executed by the external effect means outside the gaming machine, the control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as the specific information output to the outside of the gaming machine. It becomes possible.

Feature A18. The specific control means is information corresponding to a result of the privilege lottery process as the control information, and is information for enabling the contents of the predetermined effect to be determined by the effect content determining means (first control information) (Variation command) is transmitted to the effect content determination means, and second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determination means. ,
The specific output means outputs, as the specific information, the first control information or information including information used for determining the contents of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while the second control The gaming machine according to Feature A17, which does not output information including information.

  According to the feature A18, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it becomes possible to carefully check the result of the privilege lottery process in the effect content determination means. . In this case, the first control information or information corresponding to the first control information or the information corresponding to the first control information is output to the outside as the specific information, but the second control information is not output to the outside. This makes it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine and to suppress the amount of information output to the outside.

  Feature A19. The gaming machine according to Feature A17 or A18, wherein the specific control means includes the specific output means.

  According to feature A19, since the specific control means existing upstream of the control has a function of outputting specific information to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to consolidate the functions for managing the operation of the gaming machine into the specific control means. It becomes.

Feature A20. The effect processing execution means, as the effect processing, effects content determination means for determining the effect contents of the predetermined effect (in the first and fourth embodiments, the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound side MPU 82 is performed. A function to be executed, a function to execute the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute a process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment)
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, wherein the specific output means is included in the effect content determination means.

  According to the feature A20, since the specific information is externally output from the effect content determining means, the specific information is externally output so that the entire effect content of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means can be specified. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to reproduce the entire predetermined effect in the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine.

Feature A21. The privilege granting means is to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player as the granting of the privilege when the bonus granting process is won in the bonus lottery process.
When the bonus granting process is performed in the bonus lottery process, the effect execution means or other means is controlled so that the special effect corresponding to the special game state is executed after the predetermined effect is executed. Special effect control means (function of executing steps S1211 to S1220 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment, function of executing steps S2210 to S2218 of the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment In the third embodiment, the sound light side MPU 82 is provided with a function of executing the processing of steps S2605 to S2613).
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information when the special effect is started.

  According to the feature A21, when the special gaming state is being executed in the gaming machine, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect immediately before the external effect means outside the gaming machine. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game during the special game state. In addition, when reproducing at least a part of the production range of the predetermined production in the external production means outside the gaming machine, the predetermined production to be reproduced was performed before the transition to the special gaming state. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a predetermined effect.

Feature A22. As the special game state, a first special game state in which the duration is relatively long (opening / closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode) and a second special game state in which the duration is relatively short (in the low-frequency winning mode) Open / close execution mode) is set,
The feature A21 is characterized in that the specific output means outputs the specific information when entering the first special gaming state, and does not output the specific information when entering the second special gaming state. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A22, the specific information is output to the outside when the relatively long duration of the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state is started, so the effect for reproducing the predetermined effect When the period for performing is secured, the effect is executed.

  Feature A23. The gaming machine according to A21 or A22, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information in the special gaming state having a duration longer than the duration of the predetermined effect. .

  According to the feature A23, in the external effect means, the effect is executed when the period for performing the effect for reproducing the predetermined effect is secured.

  Feature A24. The external output means is related effect information (external at the start of change) for enabling execution of an external effect corresponding to the processing result of the effect process in an external effect means (external device EX) existing outside the gaming machine. A function for executing a relation output means for outputting a command and a command for change (in the first embodiment, an external output process at the start of change and an external output setting process at the start of a bonus in the main MPU 62; second embodiment) In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing in steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82, the function of executing the external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62, and the processing of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 are performed. Function to be executed, in the fourth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A23, characterized in that it comprises a).

  According to the feature A24, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means existing outside the gaming machine. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone, and it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

Feature A25. Production execution means (display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of performing the production are provided,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (game play effect) is executed as the effect process. A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The relation output means outputs the relation effect information so that the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be executed in a situation where the predetermined effect is being executed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A25, since the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect is executed in the situation where the predetermined effect is being executed in the external effect means, it is possible to perform effects related to each other at the same time, and the effect is executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to both the means and the external effect means.

Feature A26. Comprising specific control means (main MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect process execution means determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means (main MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect process. Effect content determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82; in the second embodiment, executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82) Function, in the third embodiment, the function of executing step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82)
The relation output means outputs the control information as the relation effect information or information including information used for determining the effect contents of the predetermined effect in the control information. A gaming machine according to A25.

  According to the feature A26, in the configuration in which the execution control of the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined effect control unit based on the control of the specific control unit, it is possible to execute the external effect using the control information transmitted by the specific control unit. It becomes.

  Feature A27. The gaming machine according to Feature A26, wherein the specific control means includes the relationship output means.

  According to feature A27, since the specific control means existing upstream of the control has a function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to consolidate the functions for managing the operation of the gaming machine into the specific control means. It becomes. Further, it is possible to externally output the related effect information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information in the specific control means.

Feature A28. Comprising specific control means (main MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect processing execution means corresponds to the type of control information based on the fact that the specific control means (main MPU 62) transmits control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect processing. In this manner, effect content determination means for executing effect content lottery processing for determining the effect content of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (in the first embodiment, in step S1204 in the sound light side MPU 82 and A function of executing the process of step S1206, a function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Prepared,
The relation output means outputs information corresponding to a result of the effect content lottery process as the related effect information.
The gaming machine according to Feature A25, wherein the effect content determination means includes the relation output means.

  According to the feature A28, information based on the result of the effect content lottery process executed by the effect content determination means can be externally output as the related effect information, so that the related effect corresponds to the entire predetermined effect. It is possible to perform the production. Further, since the related effect information is externally output from the effect content determining means, the configuration for outputting the related effect information based on the result of the effect content lottery process can be simplified.

Feature A29. The external effect means is a picture display means for variably displaying a picture,
The effect execution means is at least one of a sound output means (speaker unit 54) for executing a sound output effect and a light emission means (display light emitting unit 53) for executing a light emission effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A29, it is possible to perform a sound output effect or a light emission effect related to the picture display means provided outside the gaming machine on the gaming machine, and the effects on the gaming machine and each rendering means outside the gaming machine can be performed mutually. It becomes possible to relate to.

  Feature A30. The game machine according to any one of features A24 to A29, wherein the external effect means has a mode corresponding to a result of the privilege lottery process after a unit effect is executed.

  According to the feature A30, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means and notify the result. Thereby, even if the gaming machine does not have the production means having these functions, the function is performed by the external production means.

Feature A31. There is no display means for performing a reach effect for teaching the player the degree of expectation that the bonus has been won,
The gaming machine according to Feature A30, wherein the reach effect can be performed in the unit effect of the external effect means.

  According to the feature A31, the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified because the gaming machine does not have the rendering means having the function of executing the reach rendering. In addition, since the function of executing the reach effect is performed by the external effect means, the reach effect can be provided to the player.

  Feature A32. A gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A31, wherein the gaming machine front surface portion can arrange the external effect means in front of the gaming machine front surface portion.

  According to the feature A32, when the external effecting unit is used as the effecting unit of the gaming machine, the external effecting unit can be arranged at a position that is easily recognized by the player, and the degree of attention to the external effecting unit can be increased. It becomes possible to raise.

Feature A33. A window portion (window portion 51) is formed in the front portion of the gaming machine so that a gaming area formed inside the gaming machine can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
The game machine according to Feature A32, wherein the game machine front portion can arrange the external effect means at a position facing the window portion in front of the window portion.

  According to the feature A33, it is possible to arrange the external performance means at a position that is easily visible to the player, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the external performance means.

Feature A34. Production execution means (display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of performing the production are provided,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (game play effect) is executed as the effect process. A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The gaming machine is
When the gaming machine is in a corresponding state which is one of a predetermined state (high probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a state which is not the predetermined state, the effect in the effect executing means and the external effect Corresponding control means for controlling the external effects in the means to correspond to each other (function in step S1707 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, step S2507 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) Function to execute processing)
When the gaming machine is in the non-corresponding state, which is the other of the predetermined state and the state other than the predetermined state, the effect in the effect executing means and the external effect in the external effect means do not correspond to each other. Non-corresponding control means (function to execute step S1708 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, function to execute step S2508 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A33, comprising:

  According to the feature A34, depending on whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, there are cases where the effect in the effect executing means and the effect in the external effect means correspond to each other. Thereby, it becomes possible to grasp or predict whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined state by confirming the correspondence relationship between the two effects, and to make the player pay attention to both the effect executing means and the external effect means. Is possible. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

Feature A35. As a gaming state, there are a first state (high probability mode) in which a privilege is likely to be given to a player, and a second state (low probability mode) in which it is difficult to give a privilege,
The predetermined state is a state in which the player is in a first state, and a state in which the player cannot identify or is difficult to identify whether the gaming machine is in the first state or the second state. The gaming machine according to Feature A34, wherein the gaming machine is in a state of being.

  According to the feature A35, even if the state of the gaming machine is not in the first state, it is possible to confirm the correspondence between the two effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is in the first state. In this case, in order to grasp whether or not the player is in the first state, the player pays attention to both the effect execution means and the external effect means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature A36. The privilege lottery means has at least a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of winning the privilege grant is relatively high and low as a lottery mode,
The predetermined state is a state in which the high probability mode is set, and a state in which the player cannot identify or is difficult to identify whether the notification state of the gaming machine is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. The gaming machine according to Feature A34, wherein the gaming machine is in a state of being.

  According to the feature A36, even if the state of the gaming machine is a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether or not it is a high probability mode, it is possible to confirm the correspondence relationship between both effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is a high probability mode. In this case, the player pays attention to both the effect execution means and the external effect means in order to grasp whether or not the mode is the high probability mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature A37. The relationship output means includes the correspondence control means and the non-correspondence control means;
The correspondence control means outputs information for associating an external effect in the external effect means with an effect in the effect executing means as the related effect information,
In any one of features A34 to A36, the non-corresponding control means outputs, as the related effect information, information for preventing the external effect in the external effect means from corresponding to the effect in the effect executing means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A37, by adjusting the content of the effect in the external effect means, it is possible to generate a situation in which both effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means are compatible, and a situation in which they are not compatible. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the effects of the effect executing means and the external effect means while not affecting the effect execution mode of the effect executing means.

Feature A38. Comprising specific control means (main MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect process execution means determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means (main MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect process. Effect content determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82; in the second embodiment, executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82) Function, in the third embodiment, the function of executing step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82)
The game machine according to Feature A37, wherein the effect content determination means is configured to grasp an execution duration of the predetermined effect based on the control information.

  According to the feature A38, since the predetermined effect is executed over the execution duration corresponding to the control information transmitted from the specific control unit, it is difficult to change the effect content. On the other hand, when changing the correspondence between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means, the contents of the effect of the external effect means are changed. Therefore, when changing the correspondence between the two effects, the degree of freedom of the change mode is increased, and the correspondence between the two effects can be suitably changed.

  Feature A39. When a specific event (small hit result) that may occur in the course of the game occurs, the state in which one of the correspondence control means and the non-correspondence control means is performed is changed to the state in which the other control is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A34 to A38, wherein the gaming machine is changed.

  According to the feature A39, since the change in the correspondence relationship between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means is performed with the occurrence of a specific event, the event is easily understood by the player.

Feature A40. The state on the corresponding side is not the predetermined state, the state on the non-corresponding side is the predetermined state,
The non-corresponding control means is when the gaming machine is in the predetermined state, and when a specific event (small hit result) that may occur in the course of the game occurs, The gaming machine according to any one of features A34 to A39, wherein the external performance in the external performance means is not associated.

  According to the feature A40, when a specific event occurs in a situation where the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, both the performance execution means and the external performance means do not correspond. Thereby, the player who has confirmed that both effects do not correspond can grasp that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, and can increase the degree of attention to both effects.

  Feature A41. The game machine according to Feature A40, wherein in the external effect, an effect is provided that allows the effect executing means to notify in advance the type of effect that will subsequently occur.

  According to the feature A41, since the advance notification of the effect execution means is performed in the external effect, the player can predict or grasp the content of the effect that occurs after confirming the external effect. . In this case, if a specific event occurs in a situation where the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, an event occurs in which the content of the prior notification performed as an external performance does not match the content of the performance in the subsequent performance execution means To do. The player who has confirmed this phenomenon not only recognizes that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, but also feels unexpectedness in the mismatch between the two effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A42. Variable entry means (special prize-winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entrance control means (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S311 in the main MPU 62) for controlling the opening and closing of the variable entrance means;
With
The privilege granting means shifts the gaming state to a state in which the opening / closing control is executed as granting of the privilege when the privilege grant is won in the privilege lottery process.
The privilege lottery means is a specific determination result (small hit result) that does not change the mode that affects the player's profit before and after the end of the state although the transition to the state in which the opening / closing control is executed occurs. It has a specific determination means that can be determined,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A39 to A41, wherein the specific event is the specific determination result.

  According to the feature A42, it is possible to increase the advantage for the player when the specific determination result is obtained. In addition, it is possible to use the specific determination result as an opportunity for the change in the correspondence between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means, and the simplification of the configuration and the design compared to the configuration for setting a new opportunity. Simplification can be achieved.

Feature A43. The correspondence control means is configured such that a character that is the same as or corresponds to the character displayed in the effect executing means is displayed in the external effect means,
Any one of features A34 to A42, wherein the non-corresponding control means is configured to display a character different from or not corresponding to the character displayed in the effect executing means on the external effect means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A43, the change in the correspondence relationship between the effects of both the effect execution means and the external effect means is performed by changing the type of character to be displayed. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the correspondence has been changed with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature A44. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or symbol display device 41) capable of performing production,
Specific control means (main MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means;
With
The effect processing execution means includes:
As the effect processing, effect content determining means for determining the effect content based on the fact that the specific control means transmits control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (in the second embodiment, in the sound side MPU 82) A function of executing the process of step S2207, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment), and
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control in the sound light side MPU 82) for controlling the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect (game play effect) is executed in a manner corresponding to the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. A function for executing processing and sound output control processing, and a function for executing V interrupt processing in the display-side MPU 92),
With
The external output means is a predetermined output means for outputting predetermined information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect executing means (function of executing steps S2206 and S2216 in the light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment). In the third embodiment, the sound side MPU 82 has a function of executing the process of step S2611).
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A43, wherein the effect content determination means includes the predetermined output means.

  According to the feature A44, since the predetermined information is externally output from the effect content determining means, the predetermined information is externally output so that the entire content of the effect of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means can be specified. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect related to the entire content of the effect of the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

  Feature A45. The predetermined output means is used as the predetermined information to determine the content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information used as a trigger for determining the content of the predetermined effect corresponding to the output of the predetermined information. The game machine according to Feature A44, wherein the game machine outputs information including information to be played.

  According to the feature A45, in the configuration in which an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be executed by the external effect means outside the gaming machine, the control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as the predetermined information output to the outside of the gaming machine. It becomes possible.

Feature A46. The specific control means is information corresponding to a result of the privilege lottery process as the control information, and is information for enabling the contents of the predetermined effect to be determined by the effect content determining means (first control information) (Variation command) is transmitted to the effect content determination means, and second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determination means. ,
The predetermined output means outputs, as the predetermined information, the first control information or information including information used for determining the contents of the predetermined effect in the first control information. The gaming machine according to Feature A45, which does not output information.

  According to the feature A46, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it becomes possible to carefully check the result of the privilege lottery process in the effect content determination means. . In this case, the first control information or information corresponding to the first control information or the information corresponding thereto is externally output as predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, but the second control information is not externally output. This makes it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine and to suppress the amount of information output to the outside.

Feature A47. The effect content determining means is effect lottery means for executing effect content lottery processing for determining the effect contents of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (in the second embodiment, the step in the sound light side MPU 82). A function of executing the process of S2207, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
The said effect lottery means performs the said effect content lottery process in the aspect corresponding to the kind of said control information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A44 to A46, wherein the predetermined output means outputs information corresponding to a result of the effect content lottery process as the predetermined information.

  According to the feature A47, information based on the result of the effect content lottery process can be output to the outside, so that it is possible to grasp the entire effect content of the predetermined effect in a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A48. The effect content determining means transmits correspondence information (stop result command and pattern command) to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) when receiving the control information and executing the predetermined effect. (In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82, the function of executing the process of step S2604 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment)
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect of the aspect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A44 to A47, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the correspondence information as the predetermined information.

  According to the feature A48, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control unit based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining unit, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control unit is external as the predetermined information. Is output. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare the predetermined information as dedicated information, and the required storage capacity can be reduced. Further, the processing configuration for outputting the correspondence information can be used for outputting the predetermined information to the outside, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature A49. The communication method (serial communication) when the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output unit is the same as the communication method (serial communication) when the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmitting unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A49.

  According to the feature A49, it is possible to externally output the predetermined information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the correspondence information to the correspondence effect control means. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature A50. Any one of the features A44 to A49, wherein the predetermined output means outputs intermediate information (exit command) corresponding to the content of the effect during the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A50, during the execution of the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the corresponding effect by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. In addition, since the configuration of the feature A44 is provided and the production content determination means is configured to output externally, it is easy to specify the timing of external output during execution of the predetermined production, and the configuration for performing the external output is simplified. Is planned.

  Feature A51. The specific control means includes specific-side output means for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (function of executing steps S602, S803, S809, S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62). The gaming machine according to any one of features A44 to A50, wherein:

  According to the feature A51, in the configuration in which the information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is externally output by the specific control means, the external output of the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is performed by the effect content determining means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the main body of the external output according to the function of each control means. Therefore, external output can be suitably performed.

  Feature A52. The gaming machine according to Feature A51, wherein a communication method when the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output unit is different from a communication method when information is output by the specific-side output unit. .

  According to the feature A52, since the communication method varies depending on the type of information output to the outside, it is possible to perform the external output in accordance with the nature of the information, and it is possible to suitably perform the external output. .

Feature A53. The specific-side output means outputs information through an external output means (external terminal board 79),
The gaming machine according to A51 or A52, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information through the external output terminal plate.

  According to the feature A53, it is possible to collect the points for outputting information outside the gaming machine in the external output means. This facilitates wiring work for external output.

Feature A54. The specific-side output means uses one terminal in the external output means when externally outputting one information,
The game machine according to Feature A53, wherein the predetermined output means uses a plurality of terminals in the external output means when the predetermined information is externally output.

  According to feature A54, since the number of terminals for the specific control means to externally output the state of the gaming machine is one terminal, even if there are a plurality of types of gaming machine states to be externally output. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the configuration of communication for performing the external output. On the other hand, since there are a plurality of terminals for the production content determining means to externally output information corresponding to the content of the production, it is possible to output the information as a command. Thereby, it is possible to flexibly cope with diversification of types of information output to the outside.

Feature A55. Production execution means (display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of performing the production are provided,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (game play effect) is executed as the effect process. A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The external output means includes
When the first timing is reached in relation to the predetermined effect, first predetermined output means (in the first embodiment, in the main MPU 62) outputs first predetermined information including information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect. (External output process at the start of fluctuation, function of executing step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, function of executing external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment) When,
When the second timing is reached in relation to the predetermined effect, the second predetermined output means (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 62) outputs second predetermined information including information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect. A function for executing the external output setting process at the start of the bonus, a function for executing the process of step S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Function)
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A54, comprising:

  According to the feature A55, information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect is externally output at different timings as the first predetermined information and the second predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each timing by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect executed by the external effect means. .

Feature A56. The first predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the first timing before the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. 1st predetermined information containing is output,
The second predetermined output means includes information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the second timing after the timing when the content of the effect of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to Feature A55, which outputs second predetermined information.

  According to the feature A56, there is an opportunity to be output externally at each of the timing before and after the effect content of the effect executing means becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. Thereby, depending on whether or not the content of the effect corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery process is present, it is possible to produce an effect in the external effect means in a different manner, and to diversify the effect in the external effect means It becomes possible.

  Feature A57. The gaming machine according to Feature A56, wherein the second predetermined information has a larger amount of information about the content of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information than the first predetermined information.

  In a situation where the production content of the predetermined production executed by the production execution means is not the production content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, in order not to impair the function of executing the predetermined production In addition, it is not preferable that more information than necessary is provided about the content of the predetermined effect in the external effect means. On the other hand, if the content of the effect of the predetermined effect is after the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, even if a lot of information about the content of the effect of the predetermined effect is provided in the external effect means, This is preferable because it does not impair the function of being executed, and on the contrary, it is possible to perform various effects by the external effect means. In such a situation, the second predetermined information is more appropriate than the first predetermined information, because the amount of information of the production contents of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information is increased. Output can be performed.

Feature A58. The first predetermined output means is not information that makes it possible to specify the entire contents of the predetermined effect, but information corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect is used as the first predetermined information. Output
The second predetermined output means outputs, as the second predetermined information, information that makes it possible to specify the entire content of the predetermined effect, or information corresponding to a larger production range than in the case of the first predetermined information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A57, wherein the gaming machine is a thing.

  According to feature A58, since the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to a part of the effect range in the effect range included in the predetermined effect by an external effect means outside the gaming machine. It becomes. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the bonus lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means can be reproduced by the external effect means, and the predetermined effect is given to the player who missed the predetermined effect. It becomes possible to give an opportunity to confirm again.

Feature A59. The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information common to a plurality of types of the predetermined effects,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A58, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs individual second predetermined information for a plurality of types of the predetermined effects.

  According to the feature A59, when the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the common effect contents for the plurality of types of predetermined effects by the external effect means, and the second predetermined information When the information is output to the outside, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to each of the predetermined effects by the external effect means.

Feature A60. The effect processing execution means can select a plurality of types of effect content for the predetermined effect determining element as the effect content of the predetermined effect, and is common to the predetermined effect derived from the predetermined effect determining element. Production content determining means for selecting the production content so that the production content is included (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the second embodiment A function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
While the first predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates the common effect content, the first predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates non-common effect content,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A59, wherein the second predetermined information includes at least information that clearly indicates the non-common effect contents.

  According to the feature A60, since the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the common effect contents in the predetermined effect by the external effect means outside the gaming machine. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the bonus lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means can be reproduced by the external effect means, and the predetermined effect is given to the player who missed the predetermined effect. It becomes possible to give an opportunity to confirm again.

Feature A61. The first predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect as the first predetermined information, and the predetermined predetermined value is obtained regardless of whether or not the privilege grant is won in the privilege lottery process. It outputs information corresponding to the content of the production that can be executed as production,
The second predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect as the second predetermined information, and corresponds to the content of the effect that differs depending on whether or not the privilege granting is achieved in the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A60, characterized in that the information to be output is output.

  According to the feature A61, since the first predetermined information is output, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect and not clearly indicating the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means outside the gaming machine. . In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the bonus lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, it is possible to execute an effect that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process, which is an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect, in the external effect means outside the gaming machine. In this case, the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means can be reproduced by the external effect means, and the player who missed the predetermined effect can be given an opportunity to confirm the predetermined effect again. Become.

  Feature A62. The first predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates a result of the privilege lottery process, and the second predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates a result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of A55 to A61.

  According to the feature A62, each of the case where an effect is performed in an aspect in which the result of the privilege lottery process is not clearly shown in the external effect means outside the gaming machine, and the case where the effect is specified in an aspect in which the result of the privilege lottery process is clearly indicated. Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature A63. There are multiple types of benefits granted by the privilege granting means,
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information so as not to include information clearly indicating the type of the privilege.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A62, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information so as to include information clearly indicating the type of the privilege.

  According to the feature A63, it is possible to cause each of a case where an effect is provided in an aspect in which the type of privilege is not specified in an external effect means outside the gaming machine, and a case in which an effect is specified in an aspect in which the type of privilege is specified. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature A64. The predetermined effect control means causes the effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect for a predetermined duration.
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information so as not to include information that clearly indicates the predetermined duration.
The game machine according to any one of features A55 to A63, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information so as to include information that clearly indicates the predetermined duration.

  According to feature A64, there are a case where an external production means outside the gaming machine produces an effect in a mode that does not take into account a predetermined duration of the predetermined production, and a case where an production in a mode that takes into account the predetermined duration of the predetermined production. Each can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature A65. Comprising specific control means (main MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect process execution means determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means (main MPU 62) has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect process. Effect content determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82; in the second embodiment, executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82) Function, in the third embodiment, the function of executing step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82)
The gaming machine according to any one of features A55 to A64, wherein the effect content determination means includes the second predetermined output means.

  According to the feature A65, the production content determination unit can easily grasp the details of the production content of the predetermined production than the specific control unit. Therefore, the production content determination unit includes the second predetermined output unit. 2 It becomes easy to make the amount of information about the production content of the predetermined production different from the predetermined information.

Feature A66. The effect content determining means transmits correspondence information (stop result command and pattern command) to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) when receiving the control information and executing the predetermined effect. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1208 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of performing the process of step S1208. A function of executing the process of step S2604 in the MPU 82),
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means so that the corresponding effect of the aspect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed,
The game machine according to A65, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the correspondence information as the second predetermined information.

  According to the feature A66, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control unit based on the corresponding information transmitted from the effect content determining unit, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control unit is the second predetermined information. As external output. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare the second predetermined information as dedicated information, and the required storage capacity can be reduced. In addition, the processing configuration for outputting the correspondence information can be used for externally outputting the second predetermined information, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature A67. A communication method when the second predetermined information is output by the second predetermined output unit is the same as a communication method when the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmitting unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A67, it is possible to output the second predetermined information to the outside by using the processing configuration for transmitting the correspondence information to the corresponding effect control means, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature A68. The gaming machine according to any one of features A65 to A67, wherein the specific control means includes the first predetermined output means.

  According to feature A68, since the specific control means outputs the first predetermined information externally and the effect content determination means outputs the second predetermined information externally, the main body of the external output is distributed according to the function of each control means. It becomes possible. Therefore, external output can be suitably performed.

  Feature A69. The game machine according to Feature A68, wherein the first predetermined output means and the second predetermined output means output information through the same external output means (external terminal board 79).

  According to the feature A69, locations for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine can be collected in the external output means. This facilitates wiring work for external output.

Feature A70. The first predetermined output means utilizes one terminal in the external output means when externally outputting the first predetermined information,
The game machine according to Feature A69, wherein the second predetermined output means uses a plurality of terminals in the external output means for external output of the predetermined information.

  According to feature A70, since the number of terminals for external output of the first predetermined information by the specific control means is one terminal, the number of terminals is suppressed while simplifying the configuration of communication for performing the external output. It becomes possible. On the other hand, since the number of terminals for the production content determination means to output the second predetermined information to the outside is plural, it becomes possible to output the information as a command. As a result, it is possible to flexibly cope with diversification of types of predetermined information output externally.

Feature A71. An external output means (external terminal board 79) for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine;
State information output means for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine using one terminal provided in the external output means (steps S602, S803, S809, S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62) Function to execute)
With
The external output means uses a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means to output predetermined information means (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 62) that outputs information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing. Function for executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation and external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the second embodiment, function for executing processing in steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, third embodiment Any one of features A1 to A70 including a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to feature A71, since the number of terminals for externally outputting the state of the gaming machine is one terminal, even if there are a plurality of types of gaming machine states to be externally output, the external output It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the configuration of communication for performing. On the other hand, since there are a plurality of terminals for externally outputting information corresponding to the contents of the effect, it is possible to output the information as a command. Thereby, it is possible to flexibly cope with diversification of types of information output to the outside.

Feature A72. Production execution means (display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of performing the production are provided,
The effect processing execution means includes:
As the effect process, effect content determination means for determining the effect content of a predetermined effect (game turn effect) corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (in the first and fourth embodiments, the step in the sound side MPU 82) A function for executing the processes of S1203 to S1206, a function for executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment )When,
As the effect processing, predetermined effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect of the effect content determined by the effect content determination means is executed (light emission control processing and sound output in the sound side MPU 82) A function for executing control processing, and a function for executing V interrupt processing in the display-side MPU 92),
With
The effect content determining means receives control information from other control means (main-side MPU 62) and transmits control information to other control means (display-side MPU 92) when determining the effect contents of the predetermined effect. That do at least one of
The gaming machine according to Feature A71, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the control information or information corresponding to the control information using the plurality of terminals.

  According to the feature A72, in the configuration in which the control information used when executing the predetermined effect or the information corresponding to the control information is output to the outside, the information for the effect can be obtained even when there are many types of the control information. Is output externally as a command, so that it is possible to flexibly deal with the variety of types of control information.

  Feature A73. The game machine according to Feature A72, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the control information using the plurality of terminals.

  According to the feature A73, since the control information is also used as information for external output, it is not necessary to prepare the information for external output as dedicated information, and the required storage capacity can be reduced.

  Feature A74. The communication method when information is output by the predetermined output means is the same as the communication method when the control information is transmitted between the effect content determination means and the other control means. The gaming machine according to feature A72 or A73.

  According to the feature A74, it is possible to output information to the outside using a processing configuration for transmitting control information. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature A75. The effect processing execution means includes:
As the effect processing, effect content determining means for determining the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (functions of executing steps S1203 to S1206 in the light side MPU 82 in the first and fourth embodiments) In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82, the function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
Correspondence information transmission means (in the first embodiment, sound light) for transmitting correspondence information (stop result command and pattern command) corresponding to the production content determined by the production content determination means to the corresponding production control means (display side MPU 92). The function of executing the process of step S1208 in the side MPU 82, the function of executing the process of step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the process of step S2604 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Function)
With
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect of the aspect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed.
The production content determination means has the predetermined output means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A71 to A74, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the correspondence information or information corresponding thereto.

  According to the feature A75, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control unit based on the correspondence information transmitted from the effect content determining unit, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control unit or the information corresponding thereto Is output as predetermined information. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the corresponding effect in the external effect means outside the gaming machine. Further, even when there are many types of correspondence information, the production information is output as a command to the outside, so that it is possible to flexibly cope with the variety of types of correspondence information.

  Feature A76. The game machine according to Feature A75, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the correspondence information using the plurality of terminals.

  According to the feature A76, since the correspondence information is also used as the information for external output, it is not necessary to prepare the information for external output as dedicated information, and the required storage capacity can be reduced.

  Feature A77. The game according to Feature A75 or A76, wherein a communication method when information is output by the predetermined output unit is the same as a communication method when the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmission unit. Machine.

  According to the feature A77, it is possible to output information to the outside using a processing configuration for transmitting correspondence information. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature A78. The external output means uses another terminal provided in the external output terminal to output information corresponding to the processing result of the effect processing (main-side MPU 62 in the third embodiment). The game machine according to any one of features A71 to A77, which includes a function of executing the processing of steps S2507 and S2508.

  According to the feature A78, it is possible to diversify the output mode when the information corresponding to the content of the effect is output to the outside.

  Feature A79. The game machine according to Feature A79, wherein the different output means changes the type of information to be output by changing the output continuation period of information using the one terminal.

  According to the feature A79, even when information is externally output using one terminal, it is possible to externally output a plurality of types of information according to the contents of the effect.

Feature A80. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or symbol display device 41) capable of performing production,
Effect control means (sound light side MPU 82 and display side MPU 92) for controlling the execution of the effect in the effect execution means;
External output means for outputting information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect execution means to the outside of the gaming machine (in the first embodiment, external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 and external output setting at the start of bonus) A function for executing processing, a function for executing processing in steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment And a function for executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, a function for executing the process of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment).

  According to the feature A80, since information corresponding to the contents of the effect in the effect executing means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute effects related to each other beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or symbol display device 41) capable of performing production,
Effect control means (sound light side MPU 82 or display side MPU 92) for controlling execution of the effect in the effect execution means;
External output means for outputting information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect execution means to the outside of the gaming machine (in the first embodiment, external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 and external output setting at the start of bonus) A function for executing processing, a function for executing processing in steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation in the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment And the function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82, the function of executing the process of step S2704 in the main side MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment),
With
The effect control means is a predetermined effect control means (sound light) for controlling the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (game play effect) corresponding to the start event is executed when a predetermined event is triggered. A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92)
The external output means outputs specific information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect after the predetermined effect is started in the effect execution means (in the first embodiment, when the bonus is started in the main MPU 62). A function for executing the external output setting process in the second embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, since information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute effects related to each other beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  Further, even if the player misses the predetermined effect in the effect execution means, it is possible to provide the player again with an opportunity to confirm the effect corresponding to the predetermined effect. In addition, when the effects are executed at different times so that the gaming machine side is the front side and the outside of the gaming machine is the rear side, the contents of the effects can be related.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information after the predetermined effect is ended by the effect executing means.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to prevent the effect outside the gaming machine based on the external output of the specific information and the predetermined effect in the effect executing means from overlapping in time. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to each production.

  Feature B3. The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, wherein the specific information includes information that makes it possible to specify the entire contents of at least a part of the effect range of the effect contents of the predetermined effect.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to reproduce at least a part of the entire production range of the production contents of the predetermined production in the external production means provided outside the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide the player who missed the part of the effect range again with an opportunity to check the part of the effect range.

  Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics B1 to B3, wherein the identification information includes information that enables identification of the entire content of the effect of the predetermined performance.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to reproduce the entire content of the effect of the predetermined effect in the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide again an opportunity for the player who missed the predetermined effect to confirm the predetermined effect.

Feature B5. The effect control means is effect content determination means (in the first and fourth embodiments, in the sound light side MPU 82) that determines the effect contents of the predetermined effect based on the control information transmitted by the specific control means (main MPU 62). A function for executing the processes of steps S1203 to S1206, a function for executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Function)
The specific output means is used as the specific information to determine the content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information that is a trigger for determining the content of the specific effect corresponding to the output of the specific information. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the game machine outputs information including information to be processed.

  According to the feature B5, in the configuration in which an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be executed by the external effect means outside the gaming machine, the control information transmitted by the specific control means is used as the specific information output to the outside of the gaming machine. It becomes possible.

Feature B6. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
With
The specific control means is information corresponding to a result of the privilege lottery process as the control information, and is information that allows the predetermined effect control means to derive the contents of the effect of the predetermined effect. (Variation command) is transmitted to the effect content determination means, and second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determination means. ,
The specific output means outputs, as the specific information, the first control information or information including information used for determining the contents of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while the second control The gaming machine according to Feature B5, which does not output information.

  According to the feature B6, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it becomes possible to carefully check the result of the privilege lottery process in the effect content determination means. . In this case, the first control information or information corresponding to the first control information or the information corresponding to the first control information is output to the outside as the specific information, but the second control information is not output to the outside. This makes it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine and to suppress the amount of information output to the outside.

  Feature B7. The gaming machine according to Feature B5 or B6, wherein the specific control unit includes the specific output unit.

  According to the feature B7, since the specific control means existing on the upstream side of the control has a function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, the functions for managing the operation of the gaming machine can be integrated into the specific control means. It becomes.

  Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the production control unit includes the specific output unit.

  According to the feature B8, since the specific information is externally output from the effect control unit, the specific information is externally output so that the entire content of the effect of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing unit can be specified. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to reproduce the entire predetermined effect in the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine.

Feature B9. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
Special transition means (steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player when the bonus lottery process is won. Function to execute)
With
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that an effect corresponding to a result of the privilege lottery process is executed as the predetermined effect.
The effect control means is configured to cause the effect execution means to execute a special effect corresponding to the special gaming state after the predetermined effect is executed when the privilege grant is won in the privilege lottery process. Special effect control means to be controlled (in the first embodiment, the function of executing steps S1211 to S1220 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the second embodiment, executing the processes of steps S2210 to S2218 in the sound light side MPU 82. A function to execute the processing of step S2605 to step S2613 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics B1 to B8, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information when the special effect is started.

  According to the feature B9, when the special gaming state is executed in the gaming machine, the external presentation means outside the gaming machine can execute the presentation corresponding to the predetermined presentation just before that. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game during the special game state. In addition, when reproducing at least a part of the production range of the predetermined production in the external production means outside the gaming machine, the predetermined production to be reproduced was performed before the transition to the special gaming state. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that it is a predetermined effect.

Feature B10. As the special game state, a first special game state in which the duration is relatively long (opening / closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode) and a second special game state in which the duration is relatively short (in the low-frequency winning mode) Open / close execution mode) is set,
The specific output means outputs the specific information in the case of the first special gaming state, and does not output the specific information in the case of the second special gaming state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B10, the specific information is output to the outside when the relatively long duration of the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state is started, so the effect for reproducing the predetermined effect The effect will be executed only when the period for performing is secured.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to claim B9 or B10, wherein the specific output means outputs the specific information in the special gaming state having a duration longer than the duration of the predetermined effect. .

  According to the feature B11, the external effect means executes the effect only when a period for performing the effect for reproducing the predetermined effect is secured.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A80, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
Effect processing execution means for executing an effect process for executing an effect corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery process (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 82 and the display side) MPU92),
A relation output means (first output) for externally outputting relation effect information for enabling execution of an external effect corresponding to the processing result of the effect process in an external effect means (external device EX) existing outside the gaming machine In the embodiment, a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation and external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light MPU 82. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 and the function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light MPU 82, and the function of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment. Processing function), and
With
There is no display means for performing a reach effect for teaching the player the degree of expectation that the bonus has been won,
The gaming machine characterized in that the reach effect can be performed in the external effect of the external effect means.

  According to the feature C1, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means existing outside the gaming machine. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone, and it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

  Further, since the gaming machine does not have the rendering means having the function of executing the reach performance, the configuration of the gaming machine can be simplified. In this case, since the function of executing the reach effect is performed by the external effect means, the reach effect can be provided to the player.

Feature C2. Production execution means (display light-emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, or symbol display device 41) capable of performing the production are provided,
The effect processing execution means is a predetermined effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process (game play effect) is executed as the effect process. A function of executing light emission control processing and sound output control processing in the sound light side MPU 82, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display side MPU 92),
The relation output means outputs the relation effect information so that the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be executed in a situation where the predetermined effect is being executed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature C2, since the external effect corresponding to the predetermined effect is executed in the situation where the predetermined effect is being executed in the external effect means, it is possible to perform effects related to each other at the same time, and the effect is executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to both the means and the external effect means.

Feature C3. Comprising specific control means (main MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
The effect processing execution means determines the effect content of the predetermined effect based on the fact that the specific control means has transmitted control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect processing. (In the first and fourth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82, the third In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82),
The relation output means outputs the control information as the relation effect information or information including information used for determining the effect contents of the predetermined effect in the control information. A gaming machine according to C2.

  According to the feature C3, in the configuration in which the execution control of the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined effect control unit based on the control of the specific control unit, it is possible to execute the external effect using the control information transmitted by the specific control unit. It becomes.

  Feature C4. The gaming machine according to Feature C3, wherein the specific control means includes the relationship output means.

  According to the feature C4, since the specific control means existing on the upstream side of the control has a function of outputting predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, the function for managing the operation of the gaming machine can be integrated into the specific control means. It becomes. Further, it is possible to externally output the related effect information by using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information in the specific control means.

Feature C5. Comprising specific control means (main MPU 62) having the privilege lottery means,
In the aspect corresponding to the type of the control information based on the fact that the specific control means transmits control information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process as the effect processing, Effect content determination means for executing effect content lottery processing for determining the effect content of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S1204 and S1206 in the sound side MPU 82 is performed). A function to be executed, a function to execute the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute a process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment)
The relation output means outputs information corresponding to a result of the effect content lottery process as the related effect information.
The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the effect content determination unit includes the relation output unit.

  According to the feature C5, information based on the result of the effect content lottery process executed by the effect content determination means can be externally output as related effect information, so that the related effect corresponds to the entire predetermined effect. It is possible to perform the production. Further, since the related effect information is externally output from the effect content determining means, the configuration for outputting the related effect information based on the result of the effect content lottery process can be simplified.

Feature C6. The external effect means is a picture display means for variably displaying a picture,
The effect execution means is at least one of sound output means (speaker unit 54) for executing a sound output effect and light emission means (display light emitting unit 53) for executing a light emission effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C6, it is possible to perform a sound output effect or a light emission effect related to the picture display means provided outside the gaming machine on the gaming machine, and the effects on the gaming machine and each rendering means outside the gaming machine can be mutually performed. It becomes possible to relate to.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the external effect means is configured to correspond to a result of the privilege lottery process after executing the unit effect.

  According to the feature C7, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means and notify the result. Thereby, even if the gaming machine does not have the production means having these functions, the function is performed by the external production means.

  Feature C8. The gaming machine front according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine front part is configured such that the external effect means can be arranged in front of the gaming machine front part.

  According to the feature C8, when the external effect means is used as the effect means of the gaming machine, the external effect means can be arranged at a position that can be easily recognized by the player, and the degree of attention to the external effect means can be increased. It becomes possible to raise.

Feature C9. A window portion (window portion 51) is formed in the front portion of the gaming machine so that a gaming area formed inside the gaming machine can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine front according to Feature C8, wherein the gaming machine front surface portion can arrange the external effect means at a position facing the window portion in front of the window portion.

  According to the feature C9, the external effect means can be arranged at a position that is easily visible to the player, and the degree of attention to the external effect means can be increased.

Feature C10. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
Effect processing execution means for executing an effect process for executing an effect corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery process (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 82 and the display side) MPU92),
A relation output means (first output) for externally outputting relation effect information for enabling execution of an external effect corresponding to the processing result of the effect process in an external effect means (external device EX) existing outside the gaming machine In the embodiment, a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation and external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the main MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light MPU 82. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 and the function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light MPU 82, and the function of step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment. Processing function), and
With
A gaming machine front part, wherein the external effect means can be arranged in front of the gaming machine front part.

  According to the feature C10, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means existing outside the gaming machine. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone, and it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when the external effecting unit is used as the effecting unit of the gaming machine, the external effecting unit can be arranged at a position that is easily recognized by the player, and the degree of attention to the external effecting unit can be increased. It becomes.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C10, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the above-described feature group A, feature group B, and feature group C can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, with regard to the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the entrance part provided in the game area, and the display of the display device displays a variation of the pattern. A configuration is known in which when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the game state is shifted to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. The contents of the effects of the first effect and the contents of the effects of the second effect in the state corresponding to one of the predetermined state (the state that is the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) and the state that is not the predetermined state Corresponding control means for controlling so that regularity is generated between them (the function of executing step S1707 in the main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, the step S2507 in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment). Function to execute processing)
The regularity does not occur between the production content of the first production and the production content of the second production when the non-corresponding state is the other of the predetermined state and the non-predetermined state. Non-corresponding control means for controlling to be a function (function to execute step S1708 in main MPU 62 in the first embodiment, function to execute step S2508 in main MPU 62 in the third embodiment) When,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, the case where regularity arises between the 1st effect and the 2nd effect occurs depending on whether it is in a predetermined state. Thereby, it is possible to grasp or predict whether or not the gaming machine is in a predetermined state by confirming the correspondence relationship between the two effects, and to make the player pay attention to both the first effect and the second effect. Is possible. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

Feature D2. As a gaming state, there are a first state (high probability mode) in which a privilege is likely to be given to a player, and a second state (low probability mode) in which it is difficult to give a privilege,
The predetermined state is a state in which the player is in a first state, and a state in which the player cannot identify or is difficult to identify whether the state is the first state or the second state as a notification state of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the gaming machine is in a state of being.

  According to the feature D2, even if it is a situation in which it is impossible to determine whether the gaming machine is in the first state, by checking the correspondence between the first effect and the second effect, It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is in a state. In this case, the player pays attention to both the first effect and the second effect in order to grasp whether or not the player is in the first state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature D3. Judgment means (at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the grant is relatively high) A function of executing the process of step S403 in the main MPU 62);
In accordance with the determination result of the determination unit, a privilege granting unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) for granting a privilege to the player;
With
The predetermined state is a state in which the high probability mode is set, and a state in which the player cannot identify or is difficult to identify whether the notification state of the gaming machine is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the gaming machine is in a state of being.

  According to the feature D3, even if the state of the gaming machine is a situation in which it is not possible to grasp whether or not it is in the high probability mode, it is possible to confirm the correspondence between both the first effect and the second effect. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is a high probability mode. In this case, the player pays attention to both the first effect and the second effect in order to grasp whether or not the mode is the high probability mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Feature D4. When a specific event (small hit result) that may occur in the course of the game occurs, the state in which one of the correspondence control means and the non-correspondence control means is performed is changed to the state in which the other control is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the gaming machine is changed.

  According to the feature D4, since the change in the correspondence between the two effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means is performed with the occurrence of a specific event, the event is easy for the player to understand.

Feature D5. The state on the corresponding side is not the predetermined state, the state on the non-corresponding side is the predetermined state,
The non-corresponding control means is the case where the gaming machine is in the predetermined state, and when a specific event (small hit result) that may occur in the course of the game occurs, The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein control is performed such that the regularity does not occur between the production contents of the second production.

  According to the feature D5, when a specific event occurs in a situation where the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, both the first effect and the second effect do not correspond. Thereby, the player who has confirmed that both effects do not correspond can grasp that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, and can increase the degree of attention to both effects.

Feature D6. Variable entry means (special prize-winning device 32) provided in a game area where game balls flow down and provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entrance control means (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S311 in the main MPU 62) for controlling the opening and closing of the variable entrance means;
Determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (function of executing the process of step S403 in the main MPU 62);
In accordance with the determination result of the determination means, a transition means (function for executing a special figure determination process in the main MPU 62) for shifting the gaming state to a state in which the opening / closing control is executed,
With
The determination means determines that a specific determination result (small hit result) that does not change a mode that affects the player's profit before and after the end of the state occurs although the transition to the state in which the opening / closing control is executed occurs. With possible specific determination means,
The gaming machine according to Feature D4 or D5, wherein the specific event is the specific determination result.

  According to the feature D6, it is possible to increase the advantage for the player when the specific determination result is obtained. In addition, it is possible to use the specific determination result as an opportunity for changing the correspondence between the first execution and the second effect, and the simplification of the configuration and the design compared to the configuration in which a new opportunity is set. Simplification can be achieved.

Feature D7. The state on the corresponding side is not the predetermined state, the state on the non-corresponding side is the predetermined state,
In any one of the features D1 to D6, the second effect is an effect that makes it possible to notify in advance the type of the first effect that occurs after the second effect is started. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D7, since the advance notification of the first effect is performed in the second effect, the player can predict or grasp the content of the first effect that occurs after confirming the second effect. It becomes. In this case, when a specific event occurs in a situation where the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, an event occurs in which the content of the prior notification performed as the second effect does not match the content of the first effect thereafter. . The player who has confirmed this phenomenon not only recognizes that the gaming machine is in a predetermined state, but also feels unexpectedness in the mismatch between the two effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D8. The correspondence control means is configured to display a character that is the same as or corresponds to the character displayed in the first effect in the second effect,
Any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the non-corresponding control means is configured to display a character different from or not corresponding to the character displayed in the first effect in the second effect. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature D8, the correspondence relationship between the first effect and the second effect is changed by changing the type of character to be displayed. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the correspondence has been changed with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature D9. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
A game turn control means (main MPU 62) that controls the game turn operation means (special display portion 37a) to execute the game turn operation that corresponds to the result of the bonus lottery process after executing the unit effect. In step S306 to step S308).
With
The first effect and the second effect are generated in the execution times of the game turn operation different from each other, and when controlled by the corresponding control means, The production contents set in this order are selected as the production contents of the second production, and when controlled by the non-corresponding control means, the production contents are set in the following order with respect to the production contents of the first production. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the content of the effect is not selected as the effect content of the second effect.

  According to the feature D9, it is predicted or confirmed whether or not it is in a predetermined state by confirming the selection order of the production contents between the first production and the second production that are generated at different execution times of the game turning operation. It becomes possible to pay attention to the production over a plurality of execution times of the game-playing operation.

Feature D10. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54, and symbol display device 41) capable of executing the first production;
Effect control means (sound light side MPU 82 and display side MPU 92) for controlling the execution of the effect in the effect execution means;
A relation output means for outputting relation effect information for enabling execution of the second effect corresponding to the first effect in the effect execution means in the external effect means (external device EX) existing outside the gaming machine. In the first embodiment, a function of executing external output processing at the start of fluctuation and external output setting processing at the start of bonus in the main side MPU 62, and in the second embodiment, the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound side MPU 82 A function to be executed, a function to execute an external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S2611 in the sound light MPU 82, in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment. The function of executing the process of step S2704),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, comprising:

  According to the feature D10, since information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect execution means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute effects related to each other beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  Further, by comparing the first effect in the effect execution means and the second effect in the external effect means, it is possible to confirm whether or not both effects correspond. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention to both an effect execution means and an external effect means.

Feature D11. The relationship output means includes the correspondence control means and the non-correspondence control means;
The correspondence control means outputs information for making the second effect in the external effect means correspond to the first effect in the effect executing means as the related effect information,
The non-corresponding control means outputs, as the related effect information, information for making the second effect in the external effect means not correspond to the first effect in the effect executing means. Game machines.

  According to the feature D11, by adjusting the content of the effect in the external effect means, it is possible to generate a situation in which both effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means are compatible, and a situation in which they are not compatible. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the effects of the effect executing means and the external effect means while not affecting the effect execution mode of the effect executing means.

Feature D12. The production control means includes
Effect content determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, the processing of steps S1203 to S1206 in the sound light side MPU 82 is performed based on the control information received from the specific control means (main MPU 62). Function, a function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment), and
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control in the sound light side MPU 82) for controlling the effect execution means so that the first effect (game play effect) corresponding to the effect content determined by the effect content determining means is executed. A function for executing processing and sound output control processing, and a function for executing V interrupt processing in the display-side MPU 92),
With
The output means for relation outputs the relation effect information for enabling execution of the second effect corresponding to the predetermined effect in a situation where the first effect is being executed,
The game content determining means according to the feature D11, characterized in that the effect content determination means grasps an execution duration of the predetermined effect based on the control information.

  According to the feature D12, since the predetermined effect is executed over an execution duration corresponding to the control information transmitted from the specific control unit, it is difficult to change the effect content. On the other hand, when changing the correspondence between the effects of the effect execution means and the external effect means, the contents of the effect of the external effect means are changed. Therefore, when changing the correspondence between the two effects, the degree of freedom of the change mode is increased, and the correspondence between the two effects can be suitably changed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D12, features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C10, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F12, features G1 to G16, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Judgment means (at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the grant is relatively high) A function of executing the process of step S403 in the main MPU 62);
In accordance with the determination result of the determination unit, a privilege granting unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) for granting a privilege to the player;
Transition means for shifting the determination mode to the high-probability mode (function of executing a game state transition process in the main MPU 62);
An ending unit (a function for executing a mode transition process in the main MPU 62) for ending the high probability mode after the number of determinations by the determination unit reaches an end reference number in the high probability mode;
With
A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of reference end times.

  According to the feature E1, the player plays a game while expecting not only to enter the high probability mode but also to enter the high probability mode having a larger number of end reference times. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. A specific entry portion (second operation port 34) configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific pitching part (a function for executing a general-purpose power control process in the main MPU 62);
With
The determination means is configured to perform the determination based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry portion,
The acceptance control means has a relatively low chance of not entering the open state or entering the open state per unit time as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state. Having at least a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the opportunity to be in the open state per unit time is relatively high,
The gaming state includes a first gaming state that is the high probability mode and the high-frequency switching mode and ends after the number of determinations by the determination unit reaches the corresponding end reference number,
The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein a plurality of types of gaming states having different end reference counts are set as the first gaming state.

  According to the feature E2, the player plays a game while expecting not only to enter the first gaming state but also to enter the first gaming state with a larger number of end reference times. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E3. A specific entry portion (second operation port 34) configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific pitching part (a function for executing a general-purpose power control process in the main MPU 62);
With
The determination means is configured to perform the determination based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry portion,
The acceptance control means has a relatively low chance of not entering the open state or entering the open state per unit time as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state. Having at least a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the opportunity to be in the open state per unit time is relatively high,
As the gaming state, the first gaming state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode and ends after the number of determinations by the determination means reaches the corresponding end reference number, and the high probability mode A second gaming state that is in the low frequency switching mode and ends after the number of determinations by the determination means reaches the corresponding end reference number;
The gaming machine according to claim E1 or E2, wherein as the first gaming state, there is a gaming state in which the reference end count is less than the end reference count of the second gaming state.

  According to the feature E3, even in the second gaming state, the end reference count may be greater than in the first gaming state. As a result, the advantage of the second gaming state can be increased, and the expectation that the second gaming state will occur can be increased.

Feature E4. The determination means generates a transition to the second gaming state if it occurs in the low frequency switching mode, and generates a transition to the first gaming state if it occurs in the high frequency switching mode ( Provided with a predetermined determination means capable of determining that the result is an unspecified high probability winning result)
The first gaming state that is shifted when the predetermined determination result is obtained in the high-frequency switching mode is more complete than the case of the first gaming state that is shifted based on another specific determination result. The gaming machine according to Feature E3, wherein the number of times is large.

  According to the feature E4, it is possible to increase the advantage of being a predetermined determination result in the high-frequency switching mode, and it is possible to increase the expectation that the predetermined determination result will be generated.

Feature E5. A variable ball entry means (special prize winning device 32) provided so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entrance control means (function for executing the processing of steps S309 to S311 in the main MPU 62) for controlling the opening and closing of the variable entrance means;
With
The privilege granting means shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the opening / closing control is executed according to the determination result of the determining means,
The special game state includes a high game frequency special game state and a low game frequency special game state in which the frequency of entering the variable ball entry means is relatively high and low.
The high probability mode that occurs after entering the special game state with the low pitching frequency has more end reference times than the high probability mode that occurs after the special game state with the high pitch frequency. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that it comprises means for making the number of times.

  According to the feature E5, even in a special game state with a low pitching frequency, the end reference number of times in the high probability mode may be larger than that in a special game state with a high pitching frequency. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the occurrence of the special game state with the low frequency entry, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the special game state with the low frequency entry.

  Feature E6. Any of the features E1 to E5, further comprising: an expectation degree notifying means (function for executing an ending correspondence process in the sound light side MPU 82) for notifying an expectation degree that the end reference number is a large number of times. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that a large number of end reference counts are selected.

  Feature E7. There is provided a number-of-times corresponding output means (a function for executing the processing of step S2003 in the main MPU 62) for outputting the number of times of end reference or the number of times corresponding information (number of times corresponding command) corresponding to the information to the outside. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein:

  According to the feature E7, it is possible to manage the end reference count in a device provided outside the gaming machine. In addition, an effect corresponding to the end reference number can be executed by an external effect means provided outside the gaming machine.

  Feature E8. The number-corresponding output means does not output information specifying the end reference number, but outputs indirect information corresponding to the end reference number as the number-corresponding information. A gaming machine according to E7.

  According to the feature E8, when the effect corresponding to the end reference number is executed by the external effect means outside the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the end reference number from being clearly indicated by the external effect means. Become. As a result, for example, even if a communication abnormality occurs regarding the output of the number correspondence information, it is possible to prevent the abnormal end reference number from being specified, and it is difficult to confuse the player.

Feature E9. Predetermined effect control means (in the first and fourth embodiments in the sound light side MPU 82) for controlling the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (game play effect) corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed. The function of executing steps S1203 to S1207, the function of executing step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. Function)
The number-of-times correspondence output means outputs the number-of-times correspondence information after the production contents of the predetermined production become production contents corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature E9, before the production content of the predetermined production becomes the production content corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery process, it corresponds to the production that explicitly indicates the end reference number by the external production means outside the gaming machine or the completion reference number of times. The production is prevented from being executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the end reference number of times in the external effect means, without impairing the function of executing the predetermined effect.

Feature E10. Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 27);
An operation entrance part (first operation port 33) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
A determination is made as to whether or not a privilege is to be given to the player based on the game ball having entered the actuated pitching portion, and the probability of a determination result corresponding to the grant is relatively high as a determination mode. Determination means having at least a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode (function to execute the process of step S403 in the main MPU 62);
In accordance with the determination result of the determination unit, a privilege granting unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62) for granting a privilege to the player;
Transition means for shifting the determination mode to the high-probability mode (function of executing a game state transition process in the main MPU 62);
With
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of termination conditions for the high probability mode exist.

  According to the feature E10, the player not only enters the high probability mode but also plays a game while expecting the high probability mode to continue for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E10, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the feature group D and the feature group E can solve the following problems.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine performs a lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a transition of a gaming state such as a transition to a winning state occurs when the lottery result is a predetermined result To do. In addition, a gaming machine in which a plurality of modes such as a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode exist so that the probability of a predetermined winning result is relatively high as the winning / no-win lottery mode. In this case, the player plays the game while expecting a mode with a high probability of winning.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball having entered a pitching portion provided in the game area, and if the result of the lottery is a lottery result, There is known a configuration in which a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is made. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. In addition, for example, after the special gaming state is ended, a configuration in which the winning / raising lottery mode is set to one of the high probability mode and the low probability mode is also known. In the high probability mode, for example, an effect different from that in the low probability mode is executed on the display surface, for example, an operation different from that in the low probability mode is executed on a movable member provided in the game area, etc. As a result, the player plays the game while recognizing that the winning / raft lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or symbol display device 41) capable of performing production,
Production content determination means for determining the production content based on the control information transmitted by the specific control means (main-side MPU 62) (in the second embodiment, the function of executing step S2207 in the light-side MPU 82, the third implementation) In the form, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82),
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control in the sound light side MPU 82) for controlling the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect (game play effect) is executed in a manner corresponding to the effect content determined by the effect content determining means. A function for executing processing and sound output control processing, and a function for executing V interrupt processing in the display-side MPU 92),
Predetermined output means for outputting predetermined information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect executing means to the outside of the gaming machine (in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82) In the third embodiment, the function of executing step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82),
With
A game machine characterized in that the production content determination means has the predetermined output means.

  According to the feature F1, since information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect execution means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute effects related to each other beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably.

  In addition, since the predetermined information is externally output from the production content determining unit, the predetermined information can be externally output so that the entire content of the production of the predetermined production executed by the production execution unit can be specified. Become. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect related to the entire content of the effect of the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine.

Feature F2. The specific control means includes
Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, comprising:

  Since the configuration of the feature F1 is provided and the production content determination unit outputs predetermined information to the outside, the production is performed while reducing the processing load of the specific control unit in which the bonus lottery processing or the bonus grant processing is executed. An effect related to the effect in the execution means can be executed outside the gaming machine.

  Feature F3. The predetermined output means is used as the predetermined information to determine the content of the predetermined effect in the control information or the control information used as a trigger for determining the content of the predetermined effect corresponding to the output of the predetermined information. The game machine according to Feature F1 or F2, wherein the game machine outputs information including information to be processed.

  According to the feature F3, the control information transmitted by the specific control unit is used as the predetermined information to be output to the outside of the gaming machine in a configuration in which an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect can be executed by the external rendering unit outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible.

Feature F4. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
With
The specific control means is information corresponding to a result of the privilege lottery process as the control information, and is information that allows the predetermined effect control means to derive the contents of the effect of the predetermined effect. (Variation command) is transmitted to the effect content determination means, and second control information (type command), which is information corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, is transmitted to the effect content determination means. ,
The predetermined output means outputs, as the predetermined information, the first control information or information including information used to determine the content of the predetermined effect in the first control information, while the second control The gaming machine according to Feature F3, which does not output information.

  According to the feature F4, by transmitting both the first control information and the second control information from the specific control means, it becomes possible to carefully check the result of the privilege lottery process in the effect content determination means. . In this case, the first control information or information corresponding to the first control information or the information corresponding thereto is externally output as predetermined information to the outside of the gaming machine, but the second control information is not externally output. This makes it possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect outside the gaming machine and to suppress the amount of information output to the outside.

Feature F5. The effect content determining means is effect lottery means for executing effect content lottery processing for determining the effect contents of at least a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect (in the second embodiment, the step in the sound light side MPU 82). A function of executing the process of S2207, a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
The said effect lottery means performs the said effect content lottery process in the aspect corresponding to the kind of said control information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the predetermined output means outputs information corresponding to a result of the effect content lottery process as the predetermined information.

  According to the feature F5, it is possible to externally output information based on the result of the effect content lottery process, and thus it is possible to grasp the entire effect content of the predetermined effect in a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature F6. The effect content determining means transmits correspondence information (stop result command and pattern command) to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) when receiving the control information and executing the predetermined effect. (In the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82, the function of executing the process of step S2604 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment)
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect of the aspect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the correspondence information as the predetermined information.

  According to the feature F6, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control unit based on the correspondence information transmitted from the effect content determining unit, the correspondence information transmitted to the corresponding effect control unit is externally provided as predetermined information. Is output. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare the predetermined information as dedicated information, and the required storage capacity can be reduced. Further, the processing configuration for outputting the correspondence information can be used for outputting the predetermined information to the outside, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature F7. The communication method (serial communication) when the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output unit is the same as the communication method (serial communication) when the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmitting unit. The gaming machine according to Feature F6.

  According to the feature F7, it is possible to output the predetermined information to the outside using the processing configuration for transmitting the correspondence information to the correspondence effect control means. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature F8. Any one of the features F1 to F7, wherein the predetermined output means outputs midway information (exit command) corresponding to the contents of the effect during the execution of the predetermined effect during the execution of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature F8, during the execution of the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the corresponding effect by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine. Further, since the configuration of the feature F1 is provided and the production content determination means is configured to externally output, it is easy to specify the timing of external output during execution of the predetermined performance, and the configuration for performing the external output is simplified. Is planned.

  Feature F9. The specific control means includes specific-side output means for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (function of executing steps S602, S803, S809, S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62). The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein:

  According to the feature F9, in the configuration in which the information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is externally output by the specific control means, the external output of the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is performed by the effect content determining means. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the main body of the external output according to the function of each control means. Therefore, external output can be suitably performed.

  Feature F10. The gaming machine according to F9, wherein a communication method when the predetermined information is output by the predetermined output unit is different from a communication method when information is output by the specific-side output unit. .

  According to the feature F10, since the communication method varies depending on the type of information output to the outside, it is possible to perform the external output in accordance with the nature of the information, and it is possible to suitably perform the external output. .

Feature F11. The specific-side output means outputs information through an external output means (external terminal board 79),
The gaming machine according to F9 or F10, wherein the predetermined output means outputs the predetermined information through the external output terminal plate.

  According to the feature F11, locations for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine can be collected in the external output means. This facilitates wiring work for external output.

Feature F12. The specific-side output means uses one terminal in the external output means when externally outputting one information,
The game machine according to Feature F11, wherein the predetermined output means uses a plurality of terminals in the external output means when the predetermined information is externally output.

  According to feature F12, since the number of terminals for the specific control means to externally output the state of the gaming machine is one terminal, even if there are a plurality of types of gaming machine states to be externally output. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the configuration of communication for performing the external output. On the other hand, since the predetermined effect control means has a plurality of terminals for externally outputting information corresponding to the contents of the effect, the information can be output as a command. Thereby, it is possible to flexibly cope with diversification of types of information output to the outside.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F12, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features G1 to G16, the features H1 to H10, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Production execution means (display light emitting unit 53, speaker unit 54 or symbol display device 41) capable of performing production,
Predetermined effect control means (light emission control processing in the sound light side MPU 82) for controlling the effect execution means so that a predetermined effect (game play effect) corresponding to the start opportunity is executed when a predetermined start opportunity occurs And a function of executing sound output control processing, and a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display-side MPU 92),
First predetermined output means for outputting first predetermined information including information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect to the outside of the gaming machine when the first timing is reached in relation to the predetermined effect (first embodiment) Shows the external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62, the function of executing the process of step S2206 in the sound light MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the external output process at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment. Function to execute)
Second predetermined output means for outputting second predetermined information including information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect to the outside of the gaming machine when the second timing is reached in relation to the predetermined effect (first embodiment) Is a function for executing the external output setting process at the start of the bonus in the main MPU 62, a function for executing the process of step S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a step in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. The function of executing the processing of S2611),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect is externally output at different timings as the first predetermined information and the second predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each timing by the external effect means provided outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect executed by the external effect means. .

Feature G2. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
With
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed.
The first predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the first timing before the effect content of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. 1st predetermined information containing is output,
The second predetermined output means includes information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect at the second timing after the timing when the content of the effect of the predetermined effect becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, which outputs second predetermined information.

  According to the feature G2, there are opportunities to be output externally at each of the timing before and after the effect content of the effect execution means becomes the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process. Thereby, depending on whether or not the content of the effect corresponding to the result of the bonus lottery process is present, it is possible to produce an effect in the external effect means in a different manner, and to diversify the effect in the external effect means It becomes possible.

  Feature G3. The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the second predetermined information has a larger amount of information about the content of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information than the first predetermined information.

  In a situation where the production content of the predetermined production executed by the production execution means is not the production content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, in order not to impair the function of executing the predetermined production In addition, it is not preferable that more information than necessary is provided about the content of the predetermined effect in the external effect means. On the other hand, if the content of the effect of the predetermined effect is after the effect content corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process, even if a lot of information about the content of the effect of the predetermined effect is provided in the external effect means, This is preferable because it does not impair the function of being executed, and on the contrary, it is possible to perform various effects by the external effect means. In such a situation, the second predetermined information is more appropriate than the first predetermined information, because the amount of information of the production contents of the predetermined effect that can be derived from the predetermined information is increased. Output can be performed.

Feature G4. The first predetermined output means is not information that makes it possible to specify the entire contents of the predetermined effect, but information corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the predetermined effect is used as the first predetermined information. Output
The second predetermined output means outputs, as the second predetermined information, information that makes it possible to specify the entire content of the predetermined effect, or information corresponding to a larger production range than in the case of the first predetermined information. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the gaming machine is a thing.

  According to the feature G4, since the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to a part of the effect range included in the effect effect by an external effect means outside the gaming machine. It becomes. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the bonus lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means can be reproduced by the external effect means, and the predetermined effect is given to the player who missed the predetermined effect. It becomes possible to give an opportunity to confirm again.

Feature G5. The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information common to a plurality of types of the predetermined effects,
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G4, wherein the second predetermined output unit outputs the second predetermined information individually for a plurality of types of the predetermined effects.

  According to the feature G5, when the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the common effect content for the plurality of types of predetermined effects by the external effect means, and the second predetermined information When the information is output to the outside, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to each of the predetermined effects by the external effect means.

Feature G6. The predetermined effect control means can select a plurality of types of effect contents for the predetermined effect determining element as the effect contents of the predetermined effect, and is common to the predetermined effects derived from the predetermined effect determining element. The content of the production is selected so that the content of the production is included.
While the first predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates the common effect content, the first predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates non-common effect content,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the second predetermined information includes at least information that clearly indicates the non-common effect contents.

  According to the feature G6, since the first predetermined information is output to the outside, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the common effect content in the predetermined effect by the external effect means outside the gaming machine. In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the bonus lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means can be reproduced by the external effect means, and the predetermined effect is given to the player who missed the predetermined effect. It becomes possible to give an opportunity to confirm again.

Feature G7. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
With
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed.
The first predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect as the first predetermined information, and the predetermined predetermined value is obtained regardless of whether or not the privilege grant is won in the privilege lottery process. It outputs information corresponding to the content of the production that can be executed as production,
The second predetermined output means is information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect as the second predetermined information, and corresponds to the content of the effect that differs depending on whether or not the privilege granting is achieved in the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the information to be output is output.

  According to the characteristic G7, since the first predetermined information is output, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect and not clearly indicating the result of the privilege lottery process in the external effect means outside the gaming machine. . In this case, it is possible to prevent the result of the bonus lottery process from being clearly indicated by the effect outside the gaming machine, and it is possible to prevent the function of executing the predetermined effect from being impaired. On the other hand, since the second predetermined information is output, it is possible to execute an effect that clearly indicates the result of the privilege lottery process, which is an effect corresponding to the predetermined effect, in the external effect means outside the gaming machine. In this case, the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means can be reproduced by the external effect means, and the player who missed the predetermined effect can be given an opportunity to confirm the predetermined effect again. Become.

Feature G8. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
With
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed.
The first predetermined information does not include information that clearly indicates a result of the privilege lottery process, and the second predetermined information includes information that clearly indicates a result of the privilege lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G7.

  According to the feature G8, each of the case where an effect is performed in an aspect in which the result of the privilege lottery process is not clearly indicated in the external effect means outside the gaming machine, and the case where the effect is specified in an aspect in which the result of the privilege lottery process is clearly indicated. Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature G9. Privilege lottery means for executing a privilege lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function for executing a special figure variation start process in the main MPU 62);
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the bonus lottery process is won in the privilege lottery process (a function of executing steps S308 to S312 in the main MPU 62);
With
The predetermined effect control means controls the effect execution means so that the predetermined effect corresponding to the result of the privilege lottery process is executed.
There are multiple types of benefits granted by the privilege granting means,
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information so as not to include information clearly indicating the type of the privilege.
The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics G1 to G8, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the second predetermined information so as to include information clearly indicating the type of the privilege.

  According to the feature G9, it is possible to cause each of a case where an effect is produced in an aspect in which the type of privilege is not specified in an external effect means outside the gaming machine, and a case where an effect is provided in an aspect in which the type of privilege is specified. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature G10. The predetermined effect control means causes the effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect for a predetermined duration.
The first predetermined output means outputs the first predetermined information so as not to include information that clearly indicates the predetermined duration.
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G9, wherein the second predetermined output unit outputs the second predetermined information so as to include information that clearly indicates the predetermined duration.

  According to the characteristic G10, when an effect is performed in an aspect that does not take into account the predetermined duration of the predetermined effect in an external effect means outside the gaming machine, and when an effect is performed in an aspect that takes into account the predetermined duration of the predetermined effect. Each can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects executed by the external effect means.

Feature G11. Production content determination means for determining the production content of the predetermined production based on the transmission of control information by the specific control means (main MPU 62) (steps S1203 to S1203 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the first and fourth embodiments) A function of executing the process of S1206, a function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2602 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, wherein the effect content determination unit includes the second predetermined output unit.

  According to the feature G11, since the production content determination unit can easily grasp the details of the production content of the predetermined production than the specific control unit, the production content determination unit has the second predetermined output unit, so that the first predetermined information and the first 2 It becomes easy to make the amount of information about the production content of the predetermined production different from the predetermined information.

Feature G12. The effect content determining means transmits correspondence information (stop result command and pattern command) to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) when receiving the control information and executing the predetermined effect. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1208 in the sound light side MPU 82, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of performing the process of step S1208. A function of executing the process of step S2604 in the MPU 82),
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means so that the corresponding effect of the aspect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed,
The gaming machine according to Feature G11, wherein the second predetermined output means outputs the correspondence information as the second predetermined information.

  According to the feature G12, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control unit based on the correspondence information transmitted from the effect content determining unit, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control unit is the second predetermined information. As external output. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare the second predetermined information as dedicated information, and the required storage capacity can be reduced. In addition, the processing configuration for outputting the correspondence information can be used for externally outputting the second predetermined information, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature G13. The communication method when the second predetermined information is output by the second predetermined output unit is the same as the communication method when the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmitting unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature G13, it is possible to output the second predetermined information to the outside using a processing configuration for transmitting the corresponding information to the corresponding effect control means, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature G14. The gaming machine according to any one of features G11 to G13, wherein the specific control means includes the first predetermined output means.

  According to the feature G14, since the specific control means outputs the first predetermined information to the outside and the production content determination means outputs the second predetermined information to the outside, the main body of the external output is distributed according to the function of each control means. It becomes possible. Therefore, external output can be suitably performed.

  Feature G15. The gaming machine according to Feature G14, wherein the first predetermined output means and the second predetermined output means output information through the same external output means (external terminal board 79).

  According to the feature G15, it is possible to collect locations for outputting information outside the gaming machine in the external output means. This facilitates wiring work for external output.

Feature G16. The first predetermined output means utilizes one terminal in the external output means when externally outputting the first predetermined information,
The gaming machine according to Feature G15, wherein the second predetermined output means uses a plurality of terminals in the external output means when the predetermined information is externally output.

  According to the characteristic G16, since the number of terminals for the specific control means to output the first predetermined information to the outside is one terminal, the number of terminals is suppressed while simplifying the communication configuration for performing the external output. It becomes possible. On the other hand, since the number of terminals for the production content determination means to output the second predetermined information to the outside is plural, it becomes possible to output the information as a command. As a result, it is possible to flexibly cope with diversification of types of predetermined information output externally.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G16, features A1 to A80, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D12, features E1 to E10, features F1 to F12, features H1 to H10, features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the feature F group and the feature G group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, with regard to the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the entrance part provided in the game area, and the display of the display device displays a variation of the pattern. A configuration is known in which when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the game state is shifted to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. An external output means (external terminal board 79) for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine;
Using the one terminal provided in the external output means, first output means for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine (execution of step S602, step S803, step S809, step S1010, etc. in the main MPU 62) Function)
Second output means for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine using a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means (in the first embodiment, external output processing and bonus at the start of fluctuation in the main MPU 62) Function for executing external output setting process at the start, function for executing the processes of steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment A function of executing step S2704 in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, when information is output to the outside of the gaming machine, the information is externally output using one terminal provided in the external output means, and the external output means There are cases in which a plurality of terminals provided are used for external output. According to the former external output, it is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the configuration of communication for performing the external output. On the other hand, according to the latter external output, it is possible to output information as a command. Accordingly, it is possible to flexibly cope with diversification of types of information output to the outside, and it is possible to suitably perform external output.

Feature H2. The first output means outputs information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine using one terminal provided in the external output means.
The second output means uses a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means to output information corresponding to the contents of the effect in the effect executing means, according to the feature H1. Game machines.

  According to the feature H2, since the number of terminals for externally outputting the state of the gaming machine is one terminal, even if there are a plurality of types of gaming machine states to be externally output, the external output It is possible to reduce the number of terminals while simplifying the configuration of communication for performing. On the other hand, since there are a plurality of terminals for externally outputting information corresponding to the contents of the effects in the effect control means, the information can be output as a command. Thereby, it is possible to flexibly cope with diversification of types of information output to the outside.

Feature H3. Production control means (sound light side MPU 82) for controlling the execution of the production in the production execution means,
The effect control means receives control information from other control means (main MPU 62) and control information to other control means (display MPU 92) when executing a predetermined effect (game turn effect). Is to send
The game machine according to Feature H2, wherein the second output means outputs the control information or information corresponding to the control information using the plurality of terminals.

  According to the feature H3, in the configuration in which the control information used when executing the predetermined effect or the information corresponding to the control information is output to the outside, the information for the effect can be obtained even when there are many types of the control information. Is output externally as a command, so that it is possible to flexibly deal with the variety of types of control information.

  Feature H4. The game machine according to Feature H3, wherein the second output means outputs the control information using the plurality of terminals.

  According to the feature H4, since the control information is also used as information for external output, it is not necessary to prepare the information for external output as dedicated information, and it is possible to reduce the necessary storage capacity.

  Feature H5. The communication method when information is output by the second output means is the same as the communication method when the control information is transmitted between the effect control means and the other control means. The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4.

  According to the feature H5, it is possible to output information to the outside using a processing configuration for transmitting control information. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Feature H6. The production control means includes
Predetermined effect control means (first and fourth embodiments) for controlling the effect executing means so that a predetermined effect (game play effect) corresponding to the start opportunity is executed when a predetermined start opportunity is reached. In the second embodiment, the function of executing steps S1203 to S1207 in the sound light side MPU 82, the function of executing the process of step S2207 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the second embodiment, and the step in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment. The function of executing the processing of S2602),
Corresponding information transmitting means (in the first embodiment, step S1208 in the sound light side MPU 82) transmits the corresponding information (stop result command and pattern command) to the corresponding effect control means (display side MPU 92) when the predetermined effect is executed. In the second embodiment, the function of executing step S2209 in the sound light side MPU 82, the function of executing step S2604 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment), and
With
The corresponding effect control means controls the corresponding effect means (symbol display device 41) so that the corresponding effect of the aspect corresponding to the corresponding information is executed.
The production control means has the second output means,
The game machine according to any one of features H2 to H5, wherein the second output means outputs the correspondence information or information corresponding thereto.

  According to the feature H6, in the configuration in which the corresponding effect is executed by the corresponding effect control unit based on the correspondence information transmitted from the effect control unit, the corresponding information transmitted to the corresponding effect control unit or the information corresponding thereto is Externally output as predetermined information. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the corresponding effect in the external effect means outside the gaming machine. Further, even when there are many types of correspondence information, the production information is output as a command to the outside, so that it is possible to flexibly cope with the variety of types of correspondence information.

  Feature H7. The game machine according to Feature H6, wherein the second output means outputs the correspondence information using the plurality of terminals.

  According to the feature H7, since the correspondence information is also used as the information for external output, it is not necessary to prepare the information for external output as dedicated information, and the required storage capacity can be reduced.

  Feature H8. The communication method when information is output by the second output unit is the same as the communication method when the correspondence information is transmitted by the correspondence information transmission unit, The feature H6 or H7, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature H8, it is possible to output the information to the outside using a processing configuration for transmitting the correspondence information. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Feature H9. The first output means uses another terminal provided in the external output terminal to output information corresponding to the contents of the effect in the effect execution means (main output in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H8, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2507 and step S2508 of the side MPU 62).

  According to the feature H9, it is possible to diversify the output mode when the information corresponding to the content of the effect in the effect executing means is output to the outside.

  Feature H10. The game machine according to Feature H9, wherein the different output means changes the type of information to be output by changing the output continuation period of the information using the one terminal.

  According to the feature H10, even when information is externally output using one terminal, it is possible to externally output a plurality of types of information according to the content of the effect.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H10, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of I8 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. First control means (sound light side MPU 82);
Second control means (display-side MPU 92) that executes predetermined processing based on the control information transmitted by the first control means;
Means for external output (external terminal board 79) for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine;
Output execution means for causing the control information transmitted from the first control means or information corresponding thereto to be output to the outside of the gaming machine through the external output means (in the second embodiment, the step in the sound light side MPU 82) A function of executing the processes of S2206 and S2216, a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
With
The communication method when information is output by the output execution unit is the same as the communication method when the control information is transmitted between the first control unit and the second control unit. To play.

  According to the feature I1, it is possible to output information externally by using a processing configuration for transmitting control information between the first control unit and the second control unit. Therefore, it is possible to externally output information while simplifying the processing configuration, and it is possible to suitably perform external output.

  Feature I2. The gaming machine according to the feature I1, wherein the first control means includes the output execution means.

  According to the feature I2, it is possible to output the information to the outside using the processing configuration for transmitting the control information in the first control unit as it is. This makes it possible to output information externally while simplifying the processing configuration.

  Feature I3. The first control means executes a specific process based on the predetermined control information transmitted by the third control means (main-side MPU 62), and transmits information corresponding to the result of the specific process as the control information. The gaming machine according to Feature I2, characterized in that:

  According to the characteristic I3, information corresponding to the result of the specific processing in the first control unit is output to the outside of the gaming machine while making communication between the third control unit and the first control unit unnecessary for external output. It becomes possible.

  Feature I4. The third control means is a specific-side output means for outputting information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (function to execute Step S602, Step S803, Step S809, Step S1010, etc. in the main side MPU 62). The gaming machine according to Feature I3, comprising:

  According to the characteristic I4, in the configuration in which the information corresponding to the state of the gaming machine is externally output by the third control means, the information corresponding to the result of the specific processing is externally output by the first control means. By doing so, it becomes possible to assign the main body of external output according to the function of each control means. Therefore, external output can be suitably performed.

Feature I5. The third control means transmits the predetermined control information by a predetermined communication method,
The communication method when the control information is transmitted between the first control unit and the second control unit, and the communication method when the information is output by the output execution unit are the predetermined communication method. The gaming machine according to Feature I3 or I4, which is different.

  According to the feature I5, when the communication method is diversified, it is possible to output information externally while simplifying the processing configuration.

  Feature I6. The first control means controls the execution of the effect in the effect execution means (the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54), and the control information is used when a predetermined effect (game play effect) is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the gaming machine is one that transmits.

  According to the feature I6, since information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect in the effect executing means is output to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to execute effects related to each other beyond the frame of the gaming machine alone. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game suitably. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature I1, information corresponding to the content of the predetermined effect can be output to the outside while simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature I7. The first control means transmits the control information using a plurality of signal lines,
The output execution means outputs information to the outside of the gaming machine using a plurality of terminals provided in the external output means, according to any one of features I1 to I6, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I7, in the configuration that enables diversification of the types of control information, it is possible to correspond to the types of information output externally.

  As a more specific configuration of the feature I7, “the first control unit transmits the control information by one of serial communication and parallel communication, and the output execution unit One communication method outputs information to the outside of the gaming machine ”.

Feature I8. First control means (sound light side MPU 82);
Second control means (display-side MPU 92) that executes predetermined processing based on the control information transmitted by the first control means;
Means for external output (external terminal board 79) for outputting information to the outside of the gaming machine;
Output execution means for causing the control information transmitted from the first control means to be output to the outside of the gaming machine through the external output means (in the second embodiment, in steps S2206 and S2216 in the sound light side MPU 82). A function of executing the process, a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic I8, the control information transmitted from the first control means is output to the outside as it is. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare dedicated information for external output, and external output can be suitably performed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I8, the features A1 to A80, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D12, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F12, the features G1 to G16, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The invention of the feature H group and the feature I group can solve the following problems.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine performs a lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a transition of a gaming state such as a transition to a winning state occurs when the lottery result is a predetermined result To do. In addition, a gaming machine in which a plurality of modes such as a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode exist so that the probability of a predetermined winning result is relatively high as the winning / no-win lottery mode. In this case, the player plays the game while expecting a mode with a high probability of winning.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball having entered a pitching portion provided in the game area, and if the result of the lottery is a lottery result, There is known a configuration in which a specific picture combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is made. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. In addition, for example, after the special gaming state is ended, a configuration in which the winning / failing lottery mode is changed from one of the high probability mode and the low probability mode to the other is also known. In the high probability mode, for example, an effect different from that in the low probability mode is executed on the display surface, for example, an operation different from that in the low probability mode is executed on a movable member provided in the game area, etc. As a result, the player plays the game while recognizing that the winning / raft lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-mentioned example, external output of information is performed in order to make the management computer of the gaming hall recognize the state of the gaming machine. There is room.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Special prize winning device, 33 ... 1st operation port, 34 ... 2nd operation port, 41 ... Symbol display device, 51 ... Window part, 53 ... Display light emission part, 54 ... Speaker part, 62 ... Main Side MPU, 63 ... main side ROM, 79 ... external terminal board, 82 ... sound light side MPU, 83 ... sound light side ROM, 92 ... display side MPU, 301 ... external display device, EX ... external device.

Claims (1)

Control is performed so that regularity is generated between the contents of the production of the first effect and the contents of the production of the second effect when the state is a corresponding state that is one of the predetermined state and the state that is not the predetermined state. Response control means;
The regularity does not occur between the production content of the first production and the production content of the second production when the non-corresponding state is the other of the predetermined state and the non-predetermined state. Non-corresponding control means for controlling to be a thing,
With
As a gaming state, there are a first state in which a privilege is easily given to a player and a second state in which it is hard to be given,
The predetermined state is a state in which the player is in the first state, and a state in which the player cannot identify or is difficult to identify whether the notification state of the gaming machine is the first state or the second state. It is a state,
When a specific event that may occur in the course of the game occurs, the state where one of the corresponding control means and the non-corresponding control means is controlled is changed to a state where the other control is performed. A featured gaming machine.

Images